Samsung Cell Phone A877 Impression User Guide
SGH-a877 Series  
P O R T A B L E  
M O B I L E  
User Manual  
Q u a d - B A N D  
P H O N E  
Please read this manual before operating your  
phone, and keep it for future reference.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
T9 Text Input is licensed by Tegic Communications and is covered by U.S. Pat. 5,818,437; U.S. Pat. 5,953,541; U.S. Pat. 6,011,554 and  
other patents pending.  
®
ACCESS and NetFront™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of ACCESS Co., Ltd. in Japan and other countries.  
®
The Bluetooth word mark, figure mark (stylized “B Design”), and combination mark (Bluetooth word mark and “B Design”) are registered  
trademarks and are wholly owned by the Bluetooth SIG.  
microSD™ and the microSD logo are Trademarks of the SD Card Association.  
®
Openwave is a registered Trademark of Openwave, Inc.  
Devices purchased for use on AT&T's system are designed for use exclusively on AT&T's system. You agree that you won't make any  
modifications to the Equipment or programming to enable the Equipment to operate on any other system. A voice plan is required on all  
voice-capable devices, unless specifically noted otherwise in the terms governing your agreement. Some devices or plans may require you  
to subscribe to a data plan.  
Your phone is designed to make it easy for you to access a wide variety of content. For your protection, AT&T wants you to be aware that  
some applications that you enable may involve the location of your phone being shared. For applications available through AT&T, AT&T  
offers privacy controls that let you decide how an application may use the location of your phone and other phones on your account.  
However, AT&T's privacy tools do not apply to applications available outside of AT&T. Please review the terms and conditions and the  
associated privacy policy for each location-based service to learn how location information will be used and protected.  
Your phone may be used to access the Internet and to download, and/or purchase goods, applications, and services from AT&T or  
elsewhere from third parties. AT&T provides tools for you to control access to the Internet and certain Internet content. These controls may  
not be available for certain devices which bypass AT&T controls.  
A&T may collect certain types of information from your device when you use AT&T services to provide customer support and to improve its  
services. For more information on AT&T's Privacy Policy, visit http://www.att.com/privacy  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Open Source Software  
Some software components of this product incorporate source code covered under GNU General Public License (GPL), GNU Lesser General  
Public License (LGPL), OpenSSL License, BSD License and other open source licenses. To obtain the source code covered under the open  
source licenses, please visit:  
http://opensource.samsungmobile.com/index.jsp  
.
Disclaimer of Warranties; Exclusion of Liability  
EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THE EXPRESS WARRANTY CONTAINED ON THE WARRANTY PAGE ENCLOSED WITH THE PRODUCT, THE  
PURCHASER TAKES THE PRODUCT "AS IS", AND SAMSUNG MAKES NO EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER  
WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THE PRODUCT OR ITS FITNESS FOR ANY  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE; THE DESIGN, CONDITION OR QUALITY OF THE PRODUCT; THE PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT; THE  
WORKMANSHIP OF THE PRODUCT OR THE COMPONENTS CONTAINED THEREIN; OR COMPLIANCE OF THE PRODUCT WITH THE  
REQUIREMENTS OF ANY LAW, RULE, SPECIFICATION OR CONTRACT PERTAINING THERETO. NOTHING CONTAINED IN THE INSTRUCTION  
MANUAL SHALL BE CONSTRUED TO CREATE AN EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE  
PRODUCT. IN ADDITION, SAMSUNG SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM THE PURCHASE OR USE OF  
THE PRODUCT OR ARISING FROM THE BREACH OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY, INCLUDING INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL  
DAMAGES, OR LOSS OF ANTICIPATED PROFITS OR BENEFITS.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Video Share . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
Recent Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
Call Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
Data Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
Options During a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
Section 5: Entering Text ............................................... 40  
Built-in QWERTY Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
Text Input Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Changing the Entry Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Changing the Text Input Mode - Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Using T9 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
Using ABC Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
Using Numeric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44  
Using Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44  
Using the Handwriting Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44  
Changing the Text Input Mode - Handwriting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
Handwriting Mode-Entering Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Handwriting Mode-Entering Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Handwriting Mode-Entering Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Using the QWERTY Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Changing the Text Input Mode - Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Using T9 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
Using 123Sym Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
Using Emo Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
Section 1: Getting Started ..............................................6  
Setting Up Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Charging a Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
Switching the Phone On or Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Locking the Touch Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
Setting Up Your Voice Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
Section 2: Understanding Your Phone .........................11  
Features of Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
Front View of Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
Side Views of Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
Rear View of Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
Display Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
Using the Multitasking Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
Section 3: Menu Navigation .........................................18  
Menu Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
Widgets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Widget Bar Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
Understanding the Event Widget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
Section 4: Call Functions .............................................27  
Displaying Your Phone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
Making a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
Making a Call from the Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
Answering a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
Dialing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Abc Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
Section 6: Changing Your Settings ..............................52  
Sound Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Normal Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Silent Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Driving Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
Outdoor Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Display and Light Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
Time & Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
Phone Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
Reset phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
Restore phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Airplane Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Call Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
Bluetooth Secure Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69  
Configuring Your Phone’s USB Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70  
Network Profile Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70  
Applications Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72  
Memory Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73  
Software Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75  
Phone Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75  
Section 7: Cellular Video .............................................76  
Viewing a Video Clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76  
Using the Video Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76  
Customizing CV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77  
Section 8: Understanding Your Address Book ............ 79  
Address Book Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
Adding a New Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
Using Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83  
Address Book Entry Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84  
Own Phone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85  
FDN Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85  
Group Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86  
Address Book Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
Managing Address Book Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
YPmobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
Section 9: My Stuff ....................................................... 91  
My Stuff Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
Audio Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
Games and Apps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93  
Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93  
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95  
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95  
Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96  
Record Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96  
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96  
Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96  
Recent Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97  
Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97  
Memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97  
Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97  
Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
World Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98  
Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98  
Stopwatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98  
Other Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98  
Used Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98  
Section 10: Camera ......................................................99  
Using the Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99  
Camera and Camcorder Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100  
Using the Camcorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104  
Section 11: Messaging ...............................................108  
Types of Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108  
Creating and Sending Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108  
Additional Message Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109  
Viewing New Received Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110  
Using Message Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
Signing into Your Mobile Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112  
Using Instant Messaging (IM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112  
Deleting Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
Messaging Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116  
Used Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117  
Section 12: Games & Apps .........................................118  
Games & Apps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118  
Section 13: AppCenter ................................................120  
Downloading Multimedia Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120  
Ringtones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120  
Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120  
Cool Tools/Apps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121  
Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121  
Color Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121  
Answer Tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121  
Section 14: AT&T Music ............................................. 122  
Music Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122  
Shop Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123  
Using Playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126  
MusicID 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130  
XM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131  
Music Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132  
Community . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133  
Music Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133  
Section 15: AT&T GPS ................................................ 134  
Launching AT&T Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134  
Using the Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134  
Obtaining Driving Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135  
Shopping for GPS Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136  
Where . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136  
Section 16: Tools ........................................................ 137  
Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137  
Record Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137  
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138  
Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139  
Recent Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141  
Memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141  
Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141  
Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141  
World Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142  
Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143  
Stopwatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143  
Section 17: Mobile Web ..............................................144  
Accessing the Mobile Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144  
Navigation Using the WAP Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144  
Navigating via a URL Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148  
Using Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148  
Browser Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150  
Using your History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151  
Setting Browser Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152  
About Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152  
Accessing the Mobile Web Homepage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152  
Changing the WAP Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154  
Section 18: PC Studio Media Manager ......................156  
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156  
Downloading the PC Studio Media Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156  
Configuring your Phone's USB Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156  
PC Studio Media Manager home screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157  
Toolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158  
User Stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158  
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159  
Music Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159  
Photo Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164  
Photo Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166  
Video Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171  
Slide Maker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176  
Video Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177  
Music Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180  
Music Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181  
Video Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183  
Image Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185  
Video Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186  
Disk Ripping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188  
Disk Burning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189  
Section 19: Accessibility ............................................ 191  
Section 20: Health and Safety Information .............. 192  
Health and Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192  
Please Note the Following Information When Using  
Your Handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193  
Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194  
UL Certified Travel Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194  
Consumer Information on Wireless Phones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194  
Road Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200  
Responsible Listening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201  
Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203  
Using Your Phone Near Other Electronic Devices . . . . . . . . . 203  
FCC Hearing-Aid Compatibility (HAC) Regulations for  
Wireless Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204  
Potentially Explosive Environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Emergency Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206  
FCC Notice and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207  
Other Important Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207  
Product Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208  
Availability of Various Features/Ring Tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209  
Battery Standby and Talk Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209  
Battery Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209  
Care and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210  
Section 21: Warranty Information .............................212  
Standard Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212  
End User License Agreement for Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215  
Index ............................................................................220  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 1: Getting Started  
This section explains how to start using your phone by first  
configuring your hardware, activating your service, and then  
setting up your voice mail.  
Installing the SIM Card  
When you subscribe to a cellular network, you are provided with  
a plug-in SIM card loaded with your subscription details, such as  
your PIN, available optional services, and many others features.  
Setting Up Your Phone  
Prior to use it is necessary to install both the battery and SIM into  
their corresponding internal compartments. The microSD card  
slot is also located in this same internal area.  
Important!: The plug-in SIM card information and its contacts can be easily  
damaged by scratching or bending, so be careful when handling,  
inserting, or removing the card. Keep all SIM cards out of reach  
of small children.  
1. Remove the battery cover by pressing down on the cover.  
ᮣ
Carefully slide the SIM card into the SIM card socket (as  
shown on the next page) until the card locks into place.  
2. While applying pressure, slide the top portion up and away  
from the lower portion of the phone.  
•
Make sure that the card’s gold contacts face into the phone and  
that the upper-left angled corner of the card is positioned as shown.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Correct  
Incorrect  
Note: If the card is not inserted correctly, the phone does not detect the SIM  
card. Reorient the card back into the slot.  
Note: The Samsung a877 has been tested to support up to a 16GB memory  
card.  
Installing the Memory Card  
Your phone also supports the use of a memory card (microSD™)  
for data storage of such things as data, music, pictures, and  
video files. This type of memory card is designed for use with this  
mobile phone and other devices.  
Installing the Battery  
1. Insert the battery into the opening on the back of the  
phone, making sure the connectors align (1).  
ᮣ
Place the microSD card into the slot until it clicks (as  
shown).  
2. Gently press down to secure the battery (2).  
•
Make sure the microSD’s gold contact pins face downward and the  
card is securely inserted.  
Getting Started  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Charging a Battery  
Your phone is powered by a rechargeable Li-ion battery. The  
Travel Adapter is used to charge the battery, is included with your  
phone. Use only Samsung-approved batteries and chargers.  
Note: Long backlight settings, searching for service, vibrate mode, browser  
use, and other variables may reduce the battery’s talk and standby  
times.  
Although you can use the phone while the battery is charging,  
doing so will require additional charging time.  
Note: You must fully charge the battery before using your phone for the first  
time. A discharged battery recharges fully in approximately 4 hours.  
Using the Travel Adapter  
1. With the battery installed, temporarily remove the plastic  
cover (top of phone) and plug in the wall charger’s  
connector into the jack.  
3. Replace the battery cover onto the back of the phone (3).  
4. While applying pressure, slide the top portion towards the  
camera area (4) until you hear a light click.  
Important!: Verify that the handset battery is installed prior to connection. If  
the battery is not properly installed and the wall charger is  
connected, the handset may power off and on continuously,  
preventing proper operation.  
Note: Make sure the battery is properly installed before switching on the  
phone.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Note: Failure to unplug the wall charger before you remove the battery, can  
cause damage to the phone.  
Low Battery Indicator  
When the battery is weak and only a few minutes of talk time  
remain, the battery icon (  
) blinks and the device sounds a  
warning tone at regular intervals. In this condition, your phone  
conserves its remaining battery power, not by turning off the  
backlight, but by entering the dimming mode. For a quick check  
of your battery level, glance at the battery charge indicator  
located in the upper-right corner of your device’s display.  
Correct  
Incorrect  
When the battery level becomes too low, the phone automatically  
turns off.  
2. Plug the flat end of the Travel Adapter into the Power/  
Accessory Interface connector and the other end into a  
standard AC wall outlet.  
Switching the Phone On or Off  
1. Press and hold  
or  
until the phone switches  
3. When charging is finished, first unplug the adapter’s power  
plug from the AC wall outlet and then remove the flat end  
from the interface connector jack on the phone.  
on.  
The phone launches the activation splash screen and then  
proceeds to search for the network. Once the network has  
been found, you can make or receive calls.  
Warning!: If your device has a touch screen display, please note that a  
touchscreen responds best to a light touch from the pad of your  
finger or a non-metallic stylus. Using excessive force or a metallic  
object when pressing on the touch screen may damage the  
tempered glass surface and void the warranty. For more  
Note: The display language is preset to English at the factory. To change the  
language, use the Language menu. For more information, refer to  
“Changing Your Settings” on page 52.  
information, refer to “Standard Limited Warranty” on page 212.  
Getting Started  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
2. Press and hold  
Locking the Touch Screen  
1. Press (on the right side of the phone) to lock the  
touch screen.  
2. Press  
Setting Up Your Voice Mail  
, until the phone switches off.  
Accessing Your Voice Mail From Another Phone  
1. Dial your wireless phone number.  
2. When you hear your voicemail greeting, press the asterisk  
(*) key.  
again to unlock the touch screen.  
3. Enter your passcode using the onscreen keypad.  
1. In Idle mode, press  
, then touch and hold  
.
You may be prompted to enter a password.  
Note: You can also access your voicemail from the onscreen keypad by  
touching then pressing or touch Call  
.
2. Follow the tutorial to create a password, record a greeting,  
and record your name.  
Note: These steps may be different depending on your network.  
Accessing Your Voice Mail  
1. In Idle mode, press  
, then touch and hold  
.
2. When connected, follow the voice prompts from the voice  
mail center.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Section 2: Understanding Your Phone  
This section outlines some key features of your phone. It also  
displays the screen and the icons that appear when the phone is  
in use.  
Front View of Your Phone  
1
11  
10  
Features of Your Phone  
Your phone is lightweight, easy-to-use and offers many  
significant features. The following list outlines a few of the  
features included in your phone.  
•
Touch screen provides quick response to a variety of in-phone menus  
and options  
2
3
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Multitasking  
9
User friendly, menu driven access to features and options  
Ready access to the Internet  
Built-in Bluetooth technology  
Instant Messaging capability  
AT&T GPS Navigation functionality provides real-time navigation  
microSD card compatibility for use in data storage and access  
My Stuff feature provides Files, Games, Organizer, Alarm, Calendar,  
Tasks, Calculator, World Clock, Unit Converter, Timer, and Stopwatch.  
8
7
4
5
6
Understanding Your Phone  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
1. Power/Accessory Interface connector allows you to  
connect a Travel Charger or other optional accessories  
such as a USB/data cable or a hands-free headset for  
convenient, hands-free conversations.  
7. Power/End key ends a call. Press and hold for three  
seconds to turn the phone on or off. While in a menu,  
pressing this key once cancels the current input and twice  
returns the phone to Idle mode.  
2. Display shows the information needed to operate your  
phone, such as the received signal strength, phone battery  
level, time, etc.  
8. Menu key allows you to access your phone’s menu  
functions menu, such as Address Book, AT&T Music, AT&T  
GPS, MEdia Net, My Stuff, Tools, and Settings.  
•
While in the Menu screen, this key is replaced with the Messaging  
key, whose function is to create new text messages.  
3. Contacts key allows you to access your current Contacts,  
Groups and Favorites lists.  
9. Lock key (  
) lets you lock or unlock the touch  
4. Dial key allows you to access the Phone Functions menu,  
screen. If you receive an incoming call while the screen is  
locked, you can answer it by either:  
such as Dialer, Contacts, and New Message screen.  
5. Talk/Send key allows you to power on the phone, make or  
answer a call, access your History, Call Manager, and Call  
Block features.  
•
•
Pressing  
to receive the call without unlocking the screen.  
to unlock the screen and answer the call  
Pressing  
normally.  
10. Proximity sensors use the ambient light level to adjust  
keypad access. If the light path is blocked, for example,  
when holding the phone close to your ear, the touch screen  
will turn off.  
6. Back key allows you to return to the previous menu. This  
key also allows you to return to the previous page within  
the Web browser.  
•
While on the Idle screen, pressing  
calendar in the Month view.  
also displays the  
11. External speaker allows you to hear the caller and any  
ringtones or sounds offered by your phone.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Multitask key  
(
) launches the multitask menu. This  
Side Views of Your Phone  
menu provides ready access to some of the most  
commonly used features such as: Messaging, MEdia Net,  
Music Player, Games and Apps, End all?.  
2. Volume keys allow you to adjust the ringer volume while in  
standby mode or adjust the voice volume during a call.  
When receiving an incoming call, briefly press down either  
1
2
volume key (  
) to mute the ring tone.  
•
Press and hold either volume key to reject the call and send it  
directly to voicemail.  
5
4
3. Microphone allows other callers to hear you when you are  
speaking to them.  
4. Camera key allows you to both access the Picture camera  
menu and take pictures when you are in camera mode.  
Press to launch the camera.  
5. Lock key (  
) lets you lock or unlock the touch  
screen. If you receive an incoming call while the screen is  
locked, you can answer it by either:  
3
•
•
Pressing  
to receive the call without unlocking the screen.  
to unlock the screen and answer the call  
Pressing  
normally.  
Understanding Your Phone  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13  
     
Rear View of Your Phone  
Display Layout  
Your display screen provides a wealth of information about the  
phone’s status and options, as well as providing access to the  
new widget bar. The display has 4 main areas:  
1
2
Indicators  
Main Display  
area  
Widget bar  
1. Speaker is used to hear the caller when the speakerphone  
function is initiated, and also to listen to music.  
2. Camera lens is used to take pictures and shoot videos.  
Function  
categories  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Widget bar  
Displays when you are out of your service area.  
Displays when a call is in progress.  
The Widget bar provides quick access to those functions you use  
most frequently (Analog Clock, Digital Clock, Dual Clock, Top  
Five, Contact Favorites, AT&T GPS, MEdia Mall, Mobile Web,  
Today, Calendar, Favorites, Photo, Birthday, Sound Profile,  
Bluetooth, Alarm, Calculator, Music Player, Event, and Yahoo  
Search). For more information about the Widget bar, see “Widget  
Bar Navigation” on page 25.  
Displays within the lock screen when a call has been  
missed.  
x
Displays within the Event Widget as a tab when a  
call has been missed.  
Function categories  
Function categories are also shortcuts to Dial (for dialing a  
number), Contacts (accessing the Contacts list), and Menu  
(displays the icons for application access). While viewing the  
Main Menu, the Menu category changes to Messaging, that can  
be used to view and create messages.  
Displaysyourbattery’schargelevel.Themorebarsyou  
see, the more power you have remaining.  
Displays when your connection to an Edge network is  
active.  
Icons  
Displays when your phone is communicating with the  
Edge network.  
This list identifies the symbols you’ll see on your phone’s display  
and Indicator area:  
Displays when your connection to a 3G network is  
active.  
Displays your current signal strength. The greater the  
number of bars, the stronger the signal.  
Displays when your phone is communicating with the  
3G network.  
Indicates that the Airplane Mode is active. You cannot  
send or receive any calls or access online information.  
Displays when an internal microSD memory card is  
detected.  
Understanding Your Phone  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15  
 
Displays when the Sound profile is set to Normal  
(volume levels 1-7).  
Displays when the phone is connected to a computer  
via a supported USB cable connection.  
Displays within the Indicators area when a new text  
message is received.  
Displays when the Sound profile is set to silent or the  
volume has been manually lowered below level 1.  
Displays within the Event Widget as a tab when  
a new message is received.  
Displays when the Sound profile is set to Driving.  
Displays when the Sound profile is set to Outdoor.  
Displays when Bluetooth is activated.  
Displays within the Indicators area when a new  
Multimedia message is received.  
Displays within the Event Widget as a tab when  
a new voicemail message is received.  
Displays within the Event Widget as a tab when  
an event has been missed.  
Displays when a Bluetooth stereo headset has been  
paired with the phone.  
ꢀ
Displays within the Indicators area when a new voice  
mail is received.  
For more details on configuring your phone’s settings, see  
“Changing Your Settings” on page 52.  
Displays when you set an alarm to ring at a specified  
time. For more information, refer to “Alarms” on  
page 138.  
DisplayswhenCallforwardingissettoForward always.  
For more information, refer to “Call Settings” on  
page 66.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Multitask Functions  
Using the Multitasking Menu  
This key (  
) launches the Multitask menu that can be  
Pressing the Multitasking key (  
) on the left side of the  
activated from within any active window or page on the phone.  
There is no need to stop what you are doing, if you quickly want  
to jump out and activate another common feature.  
handset, allows you to choose from one of the following  
functions:  
•
•
•
•
Call: allows you to make a voice call while using the handset for other  
tasks. If Music Player is active, it is muted during the call.  
Messaging: allows you to send a text or multimedia message while  
using the handset for other tasks.  
The idea is to allow you to temporarily exit from your current  
location to access a group of common functions such as: Call,  
Messaging, Mobile Web, Music Player, Games and Apps, End  
all?. This key keeps you from having to completely exit from your  
current task or window, whether that be a text message, a web  
page, or an active call, just to quickly do something else.  
Mobile Web: allows you to launch the Mobile Web browser while using  
the handset for other tasks.  
Music Player: allows you to launch the Music Player while using the  
handset for other tasks. If an incoming call is received or you want to  
make a call, the Music Player is muted.  
Here is an example:  
You might be in the middle of typing up an email or text message,  
when you suddenly realize that you need to make a quick call.  
Typically, you would have to exit from your current message,  
navigate to the Idle screen, make your call (page 27), after which  
you would have to go back and re-create your message.  
•
•
Games and Apps: allows you to quickly access Games and  
Applications while using the handset for other tasks.  
End all?: exits the Multitask menu and returns you to your previously  
active menu or page.  
Using this same situation, all you would have to do is:  
1. Press  
until the you see the Multitask menu screen.  
2. Touch Call, then enter your number and continue the call.  
3. Once you are done, hang up the call normally and you are  
returned to the previous message screen.  
Understanding Your Phone  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17  
     
Section 3: Menu Navigation  
This section explains the menu navigation for your phone. The  
a877 has done away with the need for navigation wheels or  
keypads.Thea877iscompletelynavigablebyeitheranonscreen  
touch or scroll.  
Idle screen  
Lock key  
•
•
Touching an onscreen option activates the feature.  
Long menu list can be easily viewed by either using your fingertip to  
scroll either up or down the onscreen list, or pressing the volume  
keys up or down.  
Menu Navigation  
You can tailor the phone’s range of functions to fit your needs  
using both menus and widgets. Menus, sub-menus, and features  
can be accessed by scrolling through the available onscreen  
menus.  
Locking and Unlocking the Phone  
When the device is locked, press and hold  
a877 and display the Idle screen.  
to unlock the  
The Idle screen provides access to a wealth of phone features,  
including popup Widgets and Menu tabs (Dial, Contacts, and  
Menu).  
Menu tabs  
Opening an Application  
ᮣ
Tap the associated onscreen icon.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
•
•
Press  
previous screen.  
to exit from the current menu and return to the  
to exit from the current location/function, cancel  
Press  
your input and return to the Idle screen.  
Navigating Through Menus  
As you navigate through a menu, options display on the screen  
as scrollable lists. Menu tabs (located at the bottom of most  
screens, provide access to additional screen options).  
To navigate a scrollable list:  
1. From the Idle screen, touch  
.
2. Gently press an onscreen option.  
3. From the available list of options you can either:  
•
•
Touch an onscreen entry to activate it.  
Firmly press and slide your finger up or down the screen to scroll  
through lists of menu items.  
•
Navigate through a long list by pressing either volume key up or  
down.  
Note: Tapping or touching individual entries on the list opens the list entry.  
Menu Navigation  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Power Search Tab  
Note: Scrolling requires that you press firmly on the screen then drag. When  
scrolling through a list make sure not to touch or press individual  
entries on the list as this will open the list entry.  
Within the Contacts list (sorted alphabetically) the Power Search  
tab allows to quickly “thumb through” the alphabetical listing of  
entries by first letter (A ➔ B ➔ C, etc...). The Power Search tab is  
located along the left side of the screen and Contacts entries are  
then selected by pressing their name fields.  
1. Touch  
.
2. Press and drag the Power Search tab until the first letter of  
the name of the contact you wish to find is shown on the  
screen.  
3. Release the Power Search tab and scroll to the desired  
contact.  
Accessing the Phone’s Main Menu  
Once you display a menu list, tapping an item causes different  
functions, depending on its function. For example, you can open  
another list, add text to a message, send a message, play a song,  
or view a photo.  
1. Touch  
➔
Settings.  
2. Scroll through the list to then touch/activate the desired  
phone function.  
Power Search tab  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Scrolling Through Field Entries  
Widgets  
Some screens will ask you to assign a value to an onscreen field  
by either touching the up/down selection arrows or by quickly  
sliding through these values by using your fingertip. An example  
of these actions can be found on the Alarm page.  
The Widget bar provides quick access to mini-programs  
(widgets). This bar (located at the left of the Idle screen) gives  
you information at a glance and provides easy access to  
frequently used tools such as (Analog Clock, Digital Clock, Dual  
Clock, Top Five, Contact Favorites, AT&T GPS, AppCenter, Mobile  
Web, Today, Calendar, Favorites, Photo, Birthday, Sound Profile,  
Bluetooth, Alarm, Calculator, Music Player, Event, and Yahoo  
Search). This bar makes great use of the available space on your  
a877. The Widget bar is a pane on the side of the display screen  
that houses user-selected mini-applications and keeps them  
organized and always accessible.  
1. Touch  
➔
Tools  
➔
Alarms  
➔
Create Alarm.  
2. Touch the Alarm Time field and then adjust the hour and  
minutes values by using either the +/- buttons or by  
quickly sliding your fingertip over the numbers.  
Widget  
bar  
Menu Navigation  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
You can easily customize the Widget bar by allowing you to keep  
these mini-apps docked within the bar itself or they can also be  
undocked by dragging anywhere onto your Idle screen.  
Analog Clock: displays the current time on an  
analog clock.  
Adding and Deleting Widgets  
• Drag and drop the Analog clock onto the  
desktop to view the time in an analog format.  
To select which items are displayed or hidden within the Widget  
bar:  
Digital Clock: displays the current time on a digital  
clock.  
1. From Idle mode, touch  
Light Widget  
➔
Settings  
➔
Display and  
➔
.
• Drag and drop the Digital clock onto the  
desktop to view the time in a digital format.  
2. Touch the check box to place a check mark next to the  
Dual Clock/World Clock: displays current time in  
other user-defined international locations and find  
out what time it is another part of world.  
Widget you want to display.  
– or –  
Touch the check box again to remove the check mark and  
hide the Widget.  
• Drag and drop the World clock onto the  
desktop to view the time in dual locations. For  
more information, refer to “World Clock” on  
page 142.  
The following table contains a description of each available  
Widget, it’s function, and how to navigate to that particular  
application. If the application is already described in another  
section of this user manual, only a cross reference is then  
provided.  
Top 5: shows the top five contacts in your Contacts  
Favorites.  
Drag and drop the Top 5 onto the display screen to  
viewuptofivecontacts.YoucanSpeedDial,create  
an email message, and share video from this  
screen.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Contact Favorites: displays the Contacts Favorites  
list. You can use the pull-down Contacts menu to  
select all Contacts and Groups.  
Calendar: allows you to access the Calendar  
feature.  
3
With the Calendar feature, you can:  
• Drag and drop the Contacts Favorites onto the  
display screen to view the contacts by either  
Favorites, Groups, or all Contacts.  
• Consult the calendar by month, week, or day.  
• Set schedules and note anniversaries.  
• Write memos to keep track of your schedule.  
• Set an alarm to act as a reminder, if necessary.  
AT&T GPS: opens AT&T Navigator.  
For more information, refer to “AT&T GPS” on  
page 134.  
• For more information, refer to “Calendar” on  
page 139.  
AppCenter: opens MEdia Mall.  
Favorites: allows you to access your most  
frequentlyvisitedinternetlocationswhichyouhave  
saved as Favorites, including your account  
information,news,sports,weather,andMEdiaNet.  
For more information, refer to “AppCenter” on  
page 120.  
Mobile Web: opens the MEdia Net home page.  
For more information, refer to “Mobile Web” on  
page 144.  
Photo: allows you to view the list of photos  
downloaded from the web server, received in  
messages, or taken by the camera. You can then  
assign the image as the current wallpaper.  
Today: displays the current date (day/month/year).  
Monday  
SEP 22 2008  
• For more information, refer to “Using the  
Camera” on page 99.  
Menu Navigation  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Birthday: displays an onscreen alert for a birthday  
occurring today on the calendar. These dates have  
been previously entered for an entry within the  
AddressBookonthedayassignedforthatperson's  
birthday.  
Bluetooth: From this application you can activate  
Bluetooth and configure it so other Bluetooth  
devices can see your device by name.  
• Drag and drop, then tap the Bluetooth icon to  
launch the Bluetooth application.  
• For more information, refer to “Adding a New  
Contact” on page 79.  
• For more information, refer to “Bluetooth” on  
page 67.  
• For more information, refer to “Understanding  
the Event Widget” on page 26.  
Calculator: allows you to use a built-in calculator.  
0
• For more information, refer to “Calculator” on  
page 141.  
Sound Profile: allows you to quickly modify your  
current sound Profile.  
Music Player: allows you to play music files stored  
on the phone and control their playback.  
1:01 Play 00:01:23  
• For more information, refer to “Sound Profiles”  
on page 52.  
• Drag and drop, then tap the purple portion of  
the Music Player icon to launch the Music  
player. For more information, refer to “Music  
Player” on page 122.  
Alarm: allows you to access alarm settings.  
• For more information, refer to “Alarms” on  
page 138.  
• Touch the arrows on the widget to control the  
playback of the currently active song.  
Yahoo Search:opensthebrowserandallowsyouto  
initiate a Yahoo Search.  
• Drag and drop, then tap the search field, enter  
a keyword, and click the lens.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Widget Bar Navigation  
You can drag the widgets to the display screen to use the  
application or feature, then drag it back to the Widget Bar when  
you are finished.  
Widget  
Note: Many widgets can be used directly from the widget bar without  
dragging them onto the screen (ex: Bluetooth and Alarms).  
Accessing the Widget Bar  
1. Tap the Widget bar tab, located on the left side of the main  
display to open the widget (quick access) bar.  
Rearranging Widgets  
2. Tap the Widget bar tab again to close the widget bar.  
You can also customize the Widget bar by arranging the location  
of your current widgets. This can help you place your frequently  
used (favorite) widgets at the top of the list.  
Undocking Widgets  
You can easily customize the Widget bar by either keeping these  
mini-apps docked within the bar itself or undocking them by  
dragging anywhere onto your Main display screen.  
1. Touch and hold the widget (  
1).  
2. While still holding the icon, in a single motion, drag it away  
1. Touch and hold the widget (1).  
from the widget bar (2) then drag it back into its new  
location in the list.  
2. While still holding the icon, in a single motion, drag it over  
to the new location and release your finger from the screen  
Activating a Widget  
1. Locate your widget (whether it is still docked in the Widget  
(2). The application is now located in another menu or in  
the case of this example, on the Main display screen.  
bar or in another location).  
2. Touch the icon to activate the mini-application (widget).  
Menu Navigation  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Scrolling Through the Widget Bar  
Displays within the Birthday Widget (see below)  
when a birthday event (assigned within the Contact  
entry) is within 29 days of the current day.  
Although the Widget Bar contains a number of widgets, it can  
only display seven or eight widget icons at one time on the bar.  
ᮣ
Use your fingertip to scroll up and down along the Widget bar.  
Tip: Flick the screen in an upward motion to quickly scroll through the list.  
Indicators Area  
Understanding the Event Widget  
The Event Widget is an area that displays on the screen to inform  
you of calendar events, missed calls, or when new messages  
have been sent to the phone. The following is a description of  
these onscreen notification tabs:  
Event Widget (with tabs)  
Birthday Widget  
Displays within the Event Widget as a tab when  
a new message is received.  
Displays within the Event Widget as a tab when  
a call has been missed.  
Displays within the Event Widget as a tab when a  
new voicemail message is received.  
Displays within the Event Widget as a tab when a  
ꢀ
scheduled event has been missed.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Section 4: Call Functions  
This section describes how to make or answer a call. It also  
includes the features and functionality associated with making or  
answering a call.  
Making an International Call  
1. Touch  
appears.  
, then touch and hold  
. The + character  
For more information, refer to “Call Settings” on page 66.  
2. Use the onscreen keypad to enter the country code, area  
Displaying Your Phone Number  
code, and phone number.  
ᮣ
Touch  
Making a Call  
1. From the Idle screen, touch  
➔
Settings  
➔
Phone Information  
.
•
If you make a mistake, touch  
been deleted.  
until the desired numbers have  
and use the onscreen  
3. Touch  
or press  
.
keypad to enter the number you wish to dial.  
2. Touch or press  
Manual Pause Dialing  
.
To manually call a number with pause(s) without storing it in your  
Contacts list:  
Note: When you activate the Auto Redial option in the Voice Call menu, the  
phone will automatically redial up to 10 times when the person does  
not answer the call or is already on the phone. For more information,  
refer to “Call Settings” on page 66.  
1. Touch  
phone number.  
2. Press and hold  
and use the onscreen keypad to enter the  
to add a two-second pause, and use  
the keypad to enter the additional numbers.  
Tip: You can create pauses longer than two seconds by entering multiple P  
pauses.  
Call Functions  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Dialing a Recent Number  
3. Touch  
or press  
.
All incoming, outgoing and missed calls are recorded in the Calls  
menu. If the number or caller is listed in your Address Book, the  
associated name also displayed.  
For more information, refer to “Adding Pauses to Contact  
Numbers” on page 82.  
Correcting an Entered Number  
1. From the Idle Screen, briefly press  
.
Use the following steps to correct a mis-typed entry when  
dialing.  
2. Find the number by touching the drop down arrow to the  
right to view the call logs from the various options screens.  
Choose from: All, Missed, Made, or Received.  
1. After entering a number using the keypad.  
•
•
If you make a mistake, touch  
to erase a single character.  
3. Touch  
name if already in your Address Book).  
– or –  
Select the Contact to enter the Details page, then touch  
next to the desired phone number (or entry  
Press and hold  
to erase the entire string of numbers.  
2. Press  
to return to the Idle screen.  
Ending a Call  
ᮣ
Press  
key.  
Call or press  
to dial the number.  
Note: Press and hold  
to redial the last number.  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Answering a Call  
When a call is received the phone rings and displays the caller’s  
phone number, or name if stored in the Address Book.  
1. From the Incoming call screen, press  
.
To call the  
selected number  
•
If the Any Key option is activated (Settings ➔ Calls ➔ General ➔  
Call Answer), you can press any key to answer a call  
except  
2. End the call by pressing  
.
Note: You can answer a call while using the Address Book or other menu  
feature. After ending the call, the phone returns to the previously active  
function screen.  
To save the  
number to the  
Address Book  
Other Answering Options  
When receiving an incoming call:  
Making a Call from the Address Book  
You can store phone numbers that you use regularly on the SIM  
card or in the phone’s memory. These entries are collectively  
called the Address Book.  
ᮣ
Briefly press down either volume key (  
tone.  
) to mute the ring  
ᮣ
Press and hold either volume key to reject the call and send it  
directly to voicemail.  
For further details about the Address Book feature, see “Finding  
an Address Book Entry” on page 83.  
Call Functions  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4. Touch the Video Share onscreen button to invite the other  
party to see video shot from your phone. “Establishing a  
video connection” displays. A message is sent to the  
recipient “###-###-#### Wants to Share Video With  
You.”  
Dialing Options  
From the Idle screen and Main menu, you have the option to  
access the Dialer and initiate a call. When you manually enter  
numbers from the Dialer, you will see three dialing options  
displayed on the screen.  
•
•
Call: dials the current number entered using the onscreen keypad.  
Send Message: to create a new text message and address it to either  
a manually entered number or a current entry from your Address Book.  
Save: to store the current phone number into your Address Book as  
either a new entry or an updated number.  
Important!: When establishing a Video Share session, only the sender of the  
video clip can save the file.  
•
5. The recipient will receive a Video Share pop-up to either  
Accept or Reject the Video Share call. They should press  
the Accept soft key to continue or Reject soft key to reject  
the invitation.  
Video Share  
The Video Share features allows you to place a call and share live  
or recorded video while on the call. You can initiate or receive  
video by using the following steps.  
6. If the Auto Record option is On, a Recording Started popup  
Initiating and Receiving a Video Share Session  
displays showing the memory available for the video.  
To initiate and receive a Video Share session:  
Note: The Auto Record option (page 72) must be enabled for this popup to be  
1. From the Idle screen, touch  
keypad to enter the number you wish to dial.  
2. Touch or press  
and use the onscreen  
displayed.  
.
3. Once the call is answered, if you're both capable of Video  
Sharing, the Video Share icon appears on the screen and  
turn from grey to black (  
).  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
7. During a Video Share session, your options are displayed  
as icons on the screen. Touch the corresponding icon to  
activate the feature.  
Video Share (In-Call)  
You can begin a Video Share call during an existing call by  
touching Video Share ➔ Live.  
Play a Video Share Recording  
During a call (while not in a Live Video Share session) you can  
share a recorded video for the recipient.  
1. Touch More  
➔
Video Share  
➔
Recorded and then select  
from the available files in your Videos folder.  
Video Sharing...  
2. To make the connection, the recipient should press Accept  
14250000000  
00:01:08  
and the Video begins to play on both phones.  
Spkr Off  
Off  
Recent Calls  
Mute  
Stop  
The phone stores the numbers of the calls you’ve dialed,  
received, or missed in the Calls menu. You can access this menu  
by from the Idle screen by doing one of the following:  
Stop  
Brightness  
Zoom  
Recording  
1. Briefly press  
– or –  
.
Tip: To stop the video share call press the Stop key.  
Touch  
➔
My Stuff  
➔
Tools  
➔
Recent Calls.  
8. A pop-up message displays “Video Sharing has been  
Stopped. Your recorded video is saved in the My Stuff ➔  
Video folder.  
2. Touch the drop-down list located at the top right of the  
screen to select from All Missed Made, or Received  
,
,
.
If the number or caller is listed in your Address Book, the  
associated name is displayed.  
Call Functions  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Viewing All Calls  
Viewing Missed Calls  
1. From the Recent Calls menu, touch the drop-down and  
select the All option. All calls made, received, and missed  
are listed.  
The number of calls you have missed is displayed on the Idle  
screen.  
1. Touch the onscreen Missed Calls dialog. The most recently  
missed calls are displayed.  
2. Touch an entry from the list to view the following options:  
• Details: (touch the desired log) allows you to see the number of the  
sender, the date and time of the call, the length of the call, and the  
contact’s name, if listed in your Contact List.  
• Call: allows you to return the call automatically.  
• Video Share: allows you to share a video with the caller.  
• Send Message: allows you to sent a text or Multimedia message to  
the caller.  
• Save: allows you to save the number to your Address Book on  
either the phone or SIM card.  
• Block Caller: allows you to add the sending number to your Reject  
Note: If there is a voicemail sent by the same number, associated icons are  
List, where incoming calls are sent directly to voice mail.  
displayed and can then be selected.  
• Delete: allows you to delete the selected call or All calls.  
2. Scroll through the list of missed calls.  
3. To move to another call type, touch the call drop-down list  
(upper right of Calls page) and make your selection.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Viewing the Details of a Missed Call  
Saving a Missed Call to your Address Book  
1. Touch the Missed Calls dialog. A list of the most recently  
missed calls is displayed.  
To view the details of a selected missed call, use the following  
steps:  
1. Touch the Missed Calls dialog. A list of the most recently  
2. Touch the desired missed call.  
missed calls is displayed.  
Note: You may see different choices depending upon the settings for your  
2. Touch the desired missed call. Information for that caller is  
then displayed within a Missed Calls page. For more  
information regarding the available options, see “Viewing  
All Calls” on page 32.  
“Save New Contacts to” option.  
3. Touch Save ➔ New.  
For further details about the Address Book feature, see “Adding  
a New Contact” on page 79.  
Calling Back a Missed Call  
Sending a Message to a Missed Call  
1. Touch the Missed Calls dialog. A list of the most recently  
missed calls is displayed.  
To call back a missed call number:  
1. Touch Call (if there was only a single missed call) or touch  
the Missed Calls dialog. A list of the most recently missed  
calls is displayed.  
2. Touch the desired missed call.  
3. Touch Send Message.  
2. Touch the desired missed call.  
4. At the “Create” screen, touch the empty text field and use  
3. Touch either Call or press  
.
the onscreen alphanumeric keys to type in a message.  
5. When you are done with your message, touch OK.  
Call Functions  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
6. To add additional recipients, touch the yellow recipients  
Call Time  
field. Insert new recipients by:  
1. Touch  
➔
My Stuff  
➔
Tools  
➔
Recent Calls  
➔
Call  
Manager ➔ Call Time.  
2. Choose from one of the following options:  
•
•
•
•
Pressing the yellow field and then entering the number manually.  
Selecting from Recent Contacts to choose your recipient.  
Select an entry from your Contacts list.  
• Last Call Duration: shows the length of time for the last call.  
Selecting members of a Group  
.
• Total Dialed: shows the total length of time for the calls made.  
7. Touch Send to initiate delivery.  
• Dialed Voice Calls: shows the total length of time for all voice calls  
made.  
Deleting a Missed Call  
1. Touch the Missed Calls dialog. A list of the most recently  
missed calls is displayed.  
• Dialed Data Calls: shows the total length of time for all data calls  
made.  
• Total Received: shows the total length of time for the calls  
received.  
2. Touch Delete.  
• Received Voice Calls: shows the total length of time for all voice  
3. Place a check mark adjacent to those entries you wish to  
calls received.  
select for deletion.  
• Received Data Calls: shows the total length of time for all data  
calls received.  
•
Touching All toggles the placement of a check mark next to every  
entry in the list.  
• Total CallDuration: shows the total length of time for all calls made  
and received.  
4. Touch Delete  
.
3. Reset these fields by touching Reset All  
.
Note: You can press  
at any time to exit the Missed Call feature.  
4. Touch Yes to confirm the reset or No to cancel the  
operation.  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
5. Enter the user-defined password and touch Confirm to  
reset all counters. For more information, refer to “Change  
Phone Password” on page 64.  
3. To set these counters back to zero, touch Reset.  
•
Place a checkmark adjacent to those individual fields you would like  
reset.  
•
Touch All to place a checkmark adjacent to all fields.  
•
Press  
or  
to cancel this operation.  
4. Enter the password and touch Confirm to reset all  
counters. For more information, refer to “Change Phone  
Password” on page 64.  
Data Counter  
Data Counter refers to the amount of data (volume) to and from  
the phone.  
5. Press  
or  
to cancel this operation.  
1. Touch  
Manager ➔ Data Counter.  
2. Choose from one of the following options:  
➔
My Stuff  
➔
Tools  
➔
Recent Calls  
➔
Call  
Options During a Call  
Your phone provides a number of control functions that you can  
use during a call.  
• Last Sent: shows the size of the last data packet (measured in KB -  
kilobytes) sent by the phone since the last time this counter was  
reset.  
Adjusting the Call Volume  
During a call, to adjust the earpiece volume, use the Volume keys  
on the left side of the phone.  
• Last Received: shows the size of the last data packet (measured in  
KB - kilobytes) received by the phone since the last time this  
counter was reset.  
ᮣ
Press  
to increase the volume level and press  
to  
• Total Sent: shows the size of the total data packet (measured in KB  
- kilobytes) which have been sent by the phone since the last time  
this counter was reset.  
decrease the volume level.  
In Idle mode, you can also adjust the ringer volume using these  
same keys.  
• Total Received: shows the size of the total data packet (measured  
in KB - kilobytes) which have been received by the phone since the  
last time this counter was reset.  
Call Functions  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
–
–
Send Message to send a new text message.  
Memo to create a new memo during the active call.  
In-Call Options  
During an active call there are several functions available by  
touching a corresponding onscreen button.  
Placing a Call on Hold  
•
Spkr On/Off routes the phone’s audio through either the speaker or  
through the earpiece.  
You can place the current call on hold at any point during a  
conversation. You can also make another call while you have a  
call in progress if your network supports this service.  
–
Slide Speaker to On to route the audio through the speaker. (You can  
adjust the speaker volume using the volume keys.)  
1. While on a call, touch Hold. This action places the current  
caller on hold (which is displayed onscreen as a  
greyed-out box).  
–
Slide Speaker to Off to use the phone’s earpiece.  
•
Mute/Unmute turn the onboard microphone either on or off.  
–
Touch Mute during a call to mute the microphone.  
–
Touch Unmute to unmute the microphone.  
2. You can later reactivate this call by touching Resume.  
•
•
Video Share lets you share video during an active call. For more  
information, refer to “Video Share” on page 30.  
Dial to display the onscreen keypad, where you can choose to Save  
the entered number to your Address Book, Send a new text message,  
or initiate a new call.  
To making a new call while you have a call in progress:  
1. While on a call, touch Hold.  
More  
2. Touch  
➔
Address Book to look up a number in the  
Address Book.  
•
•
Hold to place the current active call on hold.  
More to access additional in-call options such as:  
3. Press  
to dial the second number.  
- or -  
–
–
Address Book to display your current Address Book entries.  
Save to Address Book to store the current phone number into your  
Address Book.  
Dial  
New Call  
. Once connected, each call is  
Touch  
➔
displayed within either an In call or On hold tab.  
–
View Address Book Details to view the detail information for the  
current Address Book entry. This function is only available when the  
number was previously entered into the Address Book.  
Note: The caller currently on hold appears within the On Hold tab.  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Switching Between Calls  
When you have an active call and a call on hold, you may switch  
between the two calls, changing the one on hold to active and  
placing the other on hold.  
1. Touch Swap.  
•
The current call (caller #2) is placed on hold and the previous call  
on hold (caller #1) is then reactivated so that you can continue  
conversing with that person.  
2. Press  
to end the currently active call.  
To end a specific call:  
1. Press the associated tab (In call or On hold).  
2. Touch  
to end the specific call.  
3. Press the  
key to end the remaining call.  
Using the Speakerphone During an Active Call  
While in an active call, it is possible to enable the speakerphone  
feature.  
1. Dial the number and press  
.
2. Once the call is answered, slide Speaker to On to activate  
the speakerphone.  
3. Use the Volume keys (located on the left side of your  
phone) to adjust the volume.  
Call Functions  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Call Waiting  
Important!: For more information, see “Responsible Listening” on page 201.  
The Call Waiting feature allows you to answer an incoming call  
while you have a call in progress, if this service is supported by  
Switching off the Microphone (Mute)  
the network, and you have set the Settings ➔ Call  
s
➔
Voice Call  
You can temporarily switch your phone’s microphone off, so that  
the other person cannot hear you.  
➔
Call Waiting Menu to Activated. You are notified of an  
incoming call by a call waiting tone.  
Example: You wish to say something to person in the room, but do not want  
To answer a call while you have a call in progress:  
the person on the phone to hear you.  
1. Press  
to answer the next incoming call. The first  
call is automatically put on hold.  
Note: If you are already in Video Share or you have a call on hold, you need to  
select Mute/Unmute.  
2. To switch between the two calls, touch Swap.  
• Swap: Places the current call on hold and then activates the  
To switch the microphone off temporarily during a call:  
previous call.  
1. Touch Mute. The option is then replaced with Unmute.  
To end a call on hold  
2. Touch Unmute to deactivate the Mute function and  
1. Touch the On hold tab and touch  
adjacent to the  
reactivate the microphone.  
caller you wish to disconnect.  
Searching for a Number in Address Book  
2. Press  
to end the current active call.  
1. During the active call, touch More ➔ Address Book.  
3-Way Calling (Multi-Party Calling)  
2. Touch the Address Book entry.  
The 3-Way or Multi-Party feature allows you to answer a series of  
incoming calls and place them on hold. If this service is  
supported by the network, all calls can be joined together. You  
are notified of an incoming call by a call waiting tone.  
For further details about the Address Book feature, see “Finding  
an Address Book Entry” on page 83.  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Note: The Join option combines all of the calls you have established with  
your phone (both active and on hold).  
Swap places the current call on hold and then activates the previous  
call.  
This feature joins all of the calls you have established with your  
phone (both active and on hold) into a multi-party call.  
1. Press  
to answer the first incoming call.  
2. Press  
to answer the next incoming call. The first  
call is automatically put on hold.  
3. Join the first two callers by pressing touching Join.  
• Join: combines your current set of callers into a single multi-party  
call (both active and on hold).  
4. Press  
to end the call.  
Call Functions  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5: Entering Text  
This section outlines how to select the desired text entry mode  
when entering characters using the phone keypad or the nested,  
QWERTY keyboard-style keypad. This section also describes how  
to use the T9 predictive text entry system to reduce the number  
of key strokes needed to enter text.  
Built-in QWERTY Keypad  
Display  
The a877 comes equipped with an orientation detector that can  
tell if the phone is being held in an upright (Portrait) or sideways  
(Landscape) orientation. This is useful when entering text. If the  
phone is sideways, an onscreen keyboard is displayed. When  
upright, only the alphanumeric keypad is shown.  
Clear  
Key  
The a877 not only provides several on screen keypad/keypad text  
entry options, but also provides handwriting recognition to make  
the task of text entry that much easier.  
Navigation  
Keys  
Fn (Input  
Mode) Key  
Your a877 has a built-in, keyboard-style keypad, commonly  
called QWERTY, that you can access by sliding it open from  
beneath the top section of the phone. This also automatically  
rotates the image in the display to show information in a wider,  
landscape format. Using the QWERTY keypad, you can type  
letters, numbers, punctuation, and other special characters into  
text entry fields or other applications simpler and faster than  
using the telephone keypad.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
the portrait mode. For more information on entering text in  
Landscape mode, see “Using the QWERTY Keyboard” on  
page 47.  
Text Input Options  
Your phone has the following text input modes:  
T9Ab  
•
T9  
(
): this mode allows you to enter words with only one  
Changing the Text Input Mode - Keypad  
keystroke per letter. Each key on the keypad has more than one letter;  
for example, touching  
®
can enter J, K, or L. However, the T9  
When using your phone, you often need to enter text, such as  
when storing a name in your Contacts List, creating your  
personal greeting or scheduling events on your calendar. You can  
enter alphanumeric characters by using your phone’s keypad.  
mode automatically compares the series of keystrokes you make with  
an internal linguistic dictionary to determine the most likely word, thus  
requiring far fewer keystrokes than the traditional ABC mode.  
Abc  
•
Abc  
(
): this mode allows you to enter letters by touching the key  
1. From a screen where you can enter text, touch the text  
labeled with the letter you want repeatedly, and then selecting the  
character from the available series of onscreen characters.  
entry field.  
Abc  
2. From the onscreen keypad, touch  
to change the Text  
123  
•
•
Numeric  
Symbols  
(
(
): this mode allows you to enter numbers.  
Input mode.  
SYM  
): this mode allows you to enter symbols, such as  
punctuation marks.  
Emoticons ): this mode allows you to scroll through pages of  
emoticons and then select one for insertion into your message.  
Example: Writing a text message.  
•
(
1. To change the text input mode, touch the Text Input Mode  
When you are in a field that allows character entry, the text input  
mode indicator displays on the upper right portion of the screen.  
button (bottom right button) and select one of the following  
options:  
Changing the Entry Method  
T9Ab  
•
•
•
•
T9 Predictive Text (  
)
The a877 can detect the orientation of the phone and adjust the  
text input screen accordingly. If the phone is detected in a Portrait  
(upright) orientation, only the alphanumeric keypad is shown. If  
the phone is turned on its side, the screen displays a full  
Abc  
ABC (  
)
123  
Numeric (  
Symbols (  
)
)
SYM  
keyboard (page 47). The following will describe entering text in  
Entering Text  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
•
Emoticons (  
)
•
•
If the word doesn’t display correctly, you can then choose from  
possible word choices onscreen by touching the correct one.  
2. Touch the text mode you desire. The text mode changes to  
If these choices do not include the word you want to use, touch the  
down arrow, then touch the Add Word field to then add the new  
word into the T9 dictionary.  
the mode you touched.  
Using T9 Mode  
T9 is a predictive text input mode that allows you to key in any  
character using single keystrokes. This text input mode is based  
on a built-in dictionary.  
Current input mode  
Word choices  
To enter a word in T9 mode:  
1. Touch the Text Input Mode button at the bottom of the  
Add word to  
current dictionary  
T9Ab  
screen and touch and select T9 Predictive text  
(
).  
When in T9 mode, start entering a word by touching the 2  
Text entry method  
to 9 keys. Touch each key only once for each letter.  
Example: To enter “Hello” in T9 mode, touch the 4, 3, 5, 5, and 6 keys.  
Example: Both the words “Of” and “Me” have the 6 and 3 keys. The phone  
displays the most commonly used choice first.  
The word that you are typing displays on the screen. It may  
change with each consecutive key that you touch.  
4. Insert a space by touching Space and start entering the  
next word.  
2. Enter the whole word before editing or deleting the  
keystrokes.  
Note:  
has some punctuation marks associated with it. This feature  
may not be available for some languages.  
3. When the word correctly displays, go to step 4.  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
•
To enter periods, hyphens, and other special characters, touch the Text  
advances to the next space after two seconds or when you enter  
a character on a different key.  
SYM  
Input button (bottom center), select Symbols  
(
) and then touch  
the corresponding key. If the symbol does not display on the initial  
screen, touch the left or right arrow key to display the next set of  
symbols.  
Characters scroll in the following order (lowercase characters  
shown in parentheses):  
•
•
To shift case in T9 mode, touch Shift and then touch the desired letter  
on the keypad. There are 3 cases: Initial capital, Capital lock, and  
Lower case.  
. @ , - ? ! ’ : / 1  
A B C 2  
You can move the cursor by touching where you want to place the  
D E F 3  
cursor. To delete letters, touch  
clear the entire text string.  
, or touch and hold  
key to  
G H I 4  
J K L 5  
Using ABC Mode  
To use ABC mode, use the 2 to 9 keys to enter your text.  
M N O 6  
P Q R S 7  
ᮣ
Touch the Text Input Mode button at the bottom of the screen  
Abc  
and select Abc  
(
), then touch the key labeled with the  
T U V 8  
letter you want:  
W X Y Z 9  
•
•
Once for the first letter, twice for the second letter, and so on.  
+ = < > € £ $ % & ¥ ¤ 0  
Adds a space.  
Shift the case of the character.  
To shift case in ABC mode, touch Shift. There are 3 cases: Initial  
capital, Capital lock, and Lower case.  
ABC Mode Keys  
By default, the first letter of an entry is capitalized and all  
consecutive letters are kept in lowercase (unless you touch the  
Shift key). After entering a character, the cursor automatically  
Entering Text  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using Numeric  
The Numeric mode enables you to enter numbers into a text  
message.  
Tip: The cursor moves to the right when you touch a different key. When  
entering the same letter twice or a different letter on the same key, wait  
for a few seconds for the cursor to automatically move to the right, and  
then select the next letter.  
ᮣ
Touch the Text Input Mode button at the bottom of the screen  
Using the Handwriting Feature  
1. From a screen where you can enter text, touch the Input  
Select field (shown below) to change the screen to  
Handwriting mode.  
123  
and select Numeric  
(
), then touch the keys corresponding  
to the digits you want to enter.  
Using Symbols  
Symbol mode enables you to insert symbols and punctuation  
marks into text.  
2. From the drop-down list touch Handwriting to activate the  
handwriting recognition on the phone.  
1. Touch the Text Input Mode button at the bottom of the  
SYM  
screen and select Symbols  
(
), then touch the desired  
symbol key.  
2. To display more symbols, touch the left or right arrow key.  
3. To clear the symbol(s), touch  
4. Select the other letters in the same way.  
.
•
To enter a period, comma, apostrophe, hyphen, question mark,  
exclamation point, @, colon, slash, or the number 1, touch  
ABC mode applies grammar rules to ensure correct punctuation.  
.
You can move the cursor by touching Space. To delete letters,  
touch . Touch and hold key to clear the display.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
3. Use your finger tip to write out each character. Touch the  
Shift key to use uppercase letters. Touch the Space key to  
create a space between letters, numbers, or symbols.  
Changing the Text Input Mode - Handwriting  
You can write your message using the Handwriting mode but if at  
any time you feel you can’t remember how to input text, you can  
touch the Input Select field and select Keypad.  
Note: To properly recognize the written characters and to prevent scratching  
The available Text Input modes are: abc Abc, ABC, Numeric, and  
Symbols. Each option causes the Handwriting mode to behave  
,
of the LCD, do not use script.  
differently.  
All uppercase: causes the phone to read everything  
being written as uppercase characters. Ex: HI THERE.  
Handwriting area  
ABC  
Initial uppercase: causes the phone to read words as  
having the initial character in uppercase and all  
consecutive characters of the same word as lower  
Abc  
case. Ex: Hi There  
.
All lowercase: causes the phone to read everything  
being written as uppercase characters. Ex: hi there  
abc  
123  
.
Text entry method  
Text input mode  
Numeric: causes the phone to try and interpret all  
inputsasnumbers.Ex:Theletter  
I
wouldbedisplayed  
as the number . The word HI would appear as 551  
1
.
Entering Text  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
–
You could also touch the Input Select field and choose Keypad to then  
touch and insert an empty space. After which return to the  
Handwriting mode.  
Touch the Text Input Mode button and select abc  
shown onscreen.  
Symbols: causes the phone to try and interpret all  
inputsassymbols.Ex:Theletter wouldbedisplayed  
as +). The word Hi would appear as +))0  
SYM  
H
.
abc  
•
•
•
.
is then  
Handwriting Mode-Entering Characters  
1. Touch the Text Input Mode button at the bottom of the  
Write THERE or there (in either case the abc mode causes  
characters to display as lowercase.)  
Touch the screen to insert a period.  
screen and select Abc. The input mode indicator then  
Abc  
changes to  
function.  
which activates the Initial uppercase  
Note: Draw a diagonal slash across the screen ( / ) to enter a paragraph  
return.  
2. Write the desired text using your finger.  
Handwriting Mode-Entering Numbers  
1. Touch the Text Input Mode button at the bottom of the  
•
To change the case of the alphabetic characters touch the Text  
Input Mode button and select ABC or abc  
.
screen and select Numeric. The input mode indicator then  
•
•
If you make a mistake, touch to erase a single character.  
Touch and hold to erase an entire word or line.  
123  
changes to  
which activates the number function. No  
alphabetic characters are recognized.  
As an example, to write “Hi there.” you would:  
2. Write the desired numbers using your finger.  
Abc  
•
•
•
Touch the Text Input Mode button and select Abc  
.
is then  
shown onscreen.  
•
•
If you make a mistake, touch  
to erase a single character.  
Write HI or Hi (in either case the Abc mode causes the initial  
character to be uppercase while the rest are forced into lowercase.)  
Touch and hold to erase an entire word or line.  
As an example, to write “123 Anywhere” you would:  
Draw a line ( ___ ) across the screen to insert a space. Since there  
is no letter that matches this icon, the a877 inserts an empty  
space.  
123  
•
Touch the Text Input Mode button and select Numeric  
then shown onscreen.  
.
is  
•
Write 123  
.
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Abc  
SYM  
•
•
Touch the Text Input Mode button and select Abc  
.
is then  
•
•
•
•
Touch the Text Input Mode button and select Symbols  
.
is  
shown onscreen.  
then shown onscreen.  
Write ANYWHERE or Anywhere (in either case the Abc mode  
causes the initial character to be uppercase while the rest are  
forced into lowercase.)  
Draw or touch the Input Select field, choose Keypad to then choose  
@
from several pages of available symbols.  
abc  
Touch the Text Input Mode button and select abc  
.
is then  
•
•
Draw a line ( ___ ) across the screen to insert a space. Since there  
is no letter that matches this icon, the a877 inserts an empty  
space.  
shown onscreen.  
Write ATT or att (in either case the abc mode causes all characters  
to be lowercase.)  
You could also touch the Input Select field and choose Keypad to then  
•
•
Touch the screen to insert a period.  
touch  
Handwriting mode.  
and insert an empty space. After which return to the  
Write NET or net (in either case the abc mode causes all characters  
to be lowercase.)  
Handwriting Mode-Entering Symbols  
•
•
Touch the Input Select field and choose Keypad to then touch  
to  
1. Touch the Text Input Mode button at the bottom of the  
insert an empty space. After which return to the Handwriting mode.  
screen and select Symbols. The input mode indicator then  
Select  
from the Symbols page to insert a new paragraph.  
SYM  
changes to  
which activates the symbols function.  
Using the QWERTY Keyboard  
No alphabetic or numeric characters are recognized.  
From a screen where you can enter text, rotate your phone to a  
Landscape orientation. Regardless of the current setting with the  
Input Select field (page 44), the onscreen QWERTY keyboard will  
display.  
2. Write the desired numbers using your finger.  
•
•
If you make a mistake, touch  
to erase a single character.  
Touch and hold to erase an entire word or line.  
As an example, to write “[email protected]” you would:  
abc  
•
Touch the Text Input Mode button and select abc  
shown onscreen.  
.
is then  
•
Write PAT or pat (in either case the abc mode causes all characters  
to be lowercase.)  
Entering Text  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Text Input mode  
T9: activates the T9 mode in either abc (all lower  
case) or T9Eab (where the keys default to lowercase  
until the Shift key is touched [activated]). This is  
achieved by repeatedly pressing the button to toggle  
the current state.  
Symbol-Numeric: activates the number and symbol  
keys.  
Emoticons: activates the emoticon keys.  
Abc: activates the default alphabet keys.  
This function works in conjunction with the T9  
feature.  
Text Input  
selector  
New Paragraph  
Changing the Text Input Mode - Keyboard  
There are three main keyboard layout keys that will change the  
onscreen keys within the QWERTY keyboard.  
1. Touch an onscreen Text Input mode button.  
2. Touch a corresponding key to enter the associated  
The available Text Input modes are: T9 1@, Emo, and Abc. Refer  
to the Text Input mode in the upper right hand corner to identify  
which mode you are currently in.  
,
character within the text field.  
3. Touch either  
or  
to cycle through additional  
keys. This is only available within 123Sym and Emo  
options.  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4. Touch  
to complete the message and return to the  
previous screen.  
Using T9 Mode  
1. Rotate your phone to a Landscape orientation.  
4. Use the up and down navigation keys in the word options  
box to select the desired word.  
5. Touch  
to complete the message and return to the  
previous screen.  
Note: The T9 option is available only when Abc mode has been selected.  
Using 123Sym Mode  
1. Rotate your phone to a Landscape orientation.  
2. Touch the Text Input Mode button at the bottom of the  
screen and touch  
.
2. Touch the Text Input Mode button at the bottom of the  
screen and touch  
.
3. Touch each key only once for each letter. A list of word  
options displays and includes a number indicating the  
words available to chose from.  
Entering Text  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3. Touch either  
or  
to cycle through additional  
keys.  
4. Touch  
to complete the message and return to the  
previous screen.  
Using Emo Mode  
1. Rotate your phone to a Landscape orientation.  
3. Touch either  
or  
to cycle through additional  
keys.  
4. Touch  
to complete the message and return to the  
previous screen.  
Using Abc Mode  
1. Rotate your phone to a Landscape orientation.  
Note: The Emo option is available only when 123SYM mode has been  
2. Touch the Text Input Mode button at the bottom of the  
selected.  
screen and touch  
.
2. Touch the Text Input Mode button at the bottom of the  
screen and touch  
.
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3. Touch the desired alphabetic characters. Touch  
to  
input an upper-case letter. The keyboard automatically  
reverts to lower case after the first letter in a sentence is  
typed unless you select  
letters.  
for each of the following  
4. Touch  
to complete the message and return to the  
previous screen.  
Entering Text  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 6: Changing Your Settings  
This section includes tips on how to use your phone’s features,  
as well as how to change and customize the display settings, call  
handling, security settings, and other settings associated with  
your phone.  
Editing the Normal - Call Profile  
Settings Sound Profile  
Touch the name field and not the radio button to the right.  
1. Touch  
➔
➔
➔
Normal.  
•
2. Touch drop-down menu (upper-right of the screen) and  
Sound Profiles  
This menu allows you to specify how you are informed of  
incoming calls.  
select Call.  
3. Select the Call Alert Type field and select one of the  
following and touch Save  
:
Selecting a Profile  
• Melody: the phone rings using the ring melody selected in the Ring  
1. Touch  
➔
Settings  
➔
Sound Profile.  
tone menu.  
2. Touch the radio button next to the profile name. The  
• Vibration then Melody: the phone vibrates and then starts ringing.  
selected profile activates. Choices include:  
• Vibration & Melody: the phone vibrates and plays a melody  
simultaneously.  
• Normal  
• Silent  
4. Touch the Voice Call Ringtone field, touch to select a  
ringtone and touch Save  
.
• Driving  
• Outdoor  
5. Drag the Ringtone Volume slider to the volume level you  
Normal Profile  
desire (range is 1-7).  
The phone’s profile defaults to Normal. Use the following  
procedures to change the profile.  
6. Touch the Vibration Pattern field, then touch to select  
Vibration 1 - 5  
.
7. Touch Save to return to the Sound Profiles menu.  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Editing the Normal - Message Profile  
Settings Sound Profile  
Touch the name field and not the radio button to the right.  
7. Touch the Vibration Pattern field, then touch to select  
Vibration 1 - 3  
.
1. Touch  
➔
➔
➔
Normal.  
•
8. Touch Save to return to the Sound Profiles menu.  
2. Touch drop-down menu (upper-right of the screen) and  
Editing the Normal - Phone Profile  
select Message.  
1. Touch  
➔
Settings  
➔
Sound Profile  
➔
Normal.  
3. Touch the Message Alert Type field, select one of the  
•
Touch the name field and not the radio button to the right.  
following and touch Save  
:
2. Touch drop-down menu (upper-right of the screen) and  
• Melody: the phone rings using the ring melody selected in the Ring  
tone menu.  
select Phone.  
3. Touch the Keypad Tone pull-down and select one of the  
• Vibration: the phone vibrates 3 times.  
following tones and touch Save  
:
• Vibration & Melody: the phone vibrates and plays a melody  
simultaneously.  
• Beep  
• Mute: the phone is silent and does not play a melody or vibrate.  
• Glossy  
4. Touch the Message Alert Tone field, touch to select a  
• Mute  
ringtone and touch Save  
.
4. Touch the Power On Type field, select one of the following  
and touch Save  
:
5. Touch the Message Alert Repetition pull-down and select  
• Melody: the phone rings using the ring melody selected in the Ring  
one of the following options and touch Save  
:
tone menu.  
• Once: repeats the message alert once.  
• Vibration: the phone vibrates but does not play a melody.  
• Periodic: repeats the message alert periodically.  
6. Drag the Alert Tone Volume slider to the volume level you  
desire (range is 1-7).  
• Vibration & Melody: the phone vibrates and plays a melody  
simultaneously.  
• Mute: the phone is silent and does not play a melody or vibrate.  
Changing Your Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
53  
5. Touch the Power Off Type field, select one of the following  
and touch Save  
3. Select the Call Alert Type field and select one of the  
following and touch Save  
:
:
• Melody: the phone rings using the ring melody selected in the Ring  
• Vibration: the phone vibrates 3 times.  
tone menu.  
• Mute: the phone is silent and does not play a melody or vibrate.  
4. Touch the Vibration Pattern field, then touch to select  
• Vibration: the phone vibrates but does not ring.  
• Vibration & Melody: the phone vibrates and plays a melody  
simultaneously.  
Vibration 1 - 5  
.
5. Drag the Vibration Intensity slider to the intensity level you  
• Mute: the phone is silent and does not play a melody or vibrate.  
6. Drag the Phone Sound Volume slider to the volume level  
you desire (range is 0-7).  
desire (range is 0-7).  
6. Touch Save to return to the Sound Profiles menu.  
7. Touch Save to return to the Sound Profiles menu.  
Editing the Silent - Message Profile  
1. Touch  
➔
Settings  
➔
Sound Profile  
➔
Silent.  
Silent Profile  
•
Touch the name field and not the radio button to the right.  
Silent mode is convenient when you wish to stop the phone from  
making noise, in a theater for example.  
2. Touch drop-down menu (upper-right of the screen) and  
ᮣ
Touch  
➔
Settings  
➔
Sound Profile  
➔
Silent.  
select Message.  
All sound tones are now changed to Silent.  
3. Touch the Message Alert Type field, select one of the  
following and touch Save  
:
Editing the Silent - Call Profile  
Settings Sound Profile  
Touch the name field and not the radio button to the right.  
1. Touch  
➔
➔
➔
Silent  
.
• Vibration: the phone vibrates 3 times.  
• Mute: the phone is silent and does not play a melody or vibrate.  
4. Touch the Message Alert Repetition pull-down and select  
•
2. Touch drop-down menu (upper-right of the screen) and  
one of the following options and touch Save  
:
select Call.  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
• Once: repeats the message alert once.  
• Vibration & Melody: the phone vibrates and plays a melody  
simultaneously.  
• Periodic: repeats the message alert periodically.  
5. Touch the Vibration Pattern field, then touch to select  
4. Touch the Voice Call Ringtone field, touch to select a  
ringtone and touch Save  
.
Vibration 1 - 3 and touch Save  
.
5. Drag the Ringtone Volume slider to the volume level you  
6. Drag the Vibration Intensity slider to the intensity level you  
desire (range is 1-7).  
desire (range is 0-7).  
6. Touch the Vibration Pattern field, then touch to select  
7. Touch Save to return to the Sound Profiles menu.  
Vibration 1 - 5 and touch Save  
.
Driving Profile  
In this case, the speaker is active and launches the currently  
selected Call alert type when the associated notification is  
activated.  
7. Touch Save to return to the Sound Profiles menu.  
Editing the Driving - Message Profile  
1. Touch  
➔
Settings  
➔
Sound Profile  
➔
Driving.  
Editing the Driving - Call Profile  
•
Touch the name field and not the radio button to the right.  
1. Touch  
➔
Settings  
➔
Sound Profile  
➔
Driving.  
2. Touch drop-down menu (upper-right of the screen) and  
•
Touch the name field and not the radio button to the right.  
select Message.  
2. Touch drop-down menu (upper-right of the screen) and  
3. Touch the Message Alert Type field, select one of the  
select Call.  
following and touch Save  
:
3. Select the Call Alert Type field and select one of the  
• Melody: the phone rings using the ring melody selected in the Ring  
tone menu.  
following and touch Save  
:
• Vibration: the phone vibrates but does not ring.  
• Melody: the phone rings using the ring melody selected in the Ring  
tone menu.  
• Vibration & Melody: the phone vibrates and plays a melody  
simultaneously.  
• Vibration then Melody: the phone vibrates and then starts ringing.  
Changing Your Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
55  
 
• Mute: the phone is silent and does not play a melody or vibrate.  
• Glossy  
4. Touch the Message Alert Tone field, then touch to select  
• Mute  
4. Touch the Power On Type field, select one of the following  
Message Tone 1 - 4 and touch Save  
.
and touch Save  
:
5. Touch the Message Alert Repetition pull-down and select  
• Melody: the phone rings using the ring melody selected in the Ring  
one of the following options and touch Save  
:
tone menu.  
• Once: repeats the message alert once.  
• Vibration: the phone vibrates but does not play a melody.  
• Periodic: repeats the message alert periodically.  
6. Drag the Alert Tone Volume slider to the volume level you  
desire (range is 1-7).  
• Vibration & Melody: the phone vibrates and plays a melody  
simultaneously.  
• Mute: the phone is silent and does not play a melody or vibrate.  
7. Touch the Vibration Pattern field, then touch to select  
5. Touch the Power Off Type field, select one of the following  
Vibration 1 - 3 and touch Save  
.
and touch Save:  
• Melody: the phone rings using the ring melody selected in the Ring  
8. Touch Save to return to the Sound Profiles menu.  
tone menu.  
Editing the Driving - Phone Profile  
• Vibration: the phone vibrates but does not ring.  
1. Touch  
➔
Settings  
➔
Sound Profile  
➔
Driving.  
• Vibration & Melody: the phone vibrates and plays a melody  
simultaneously.  
•
Touch the name field and not the radio button to the right.  
• Mute: the phone is silent and does not play a melody or vibrate.  
6. Drag the Phone Sound Volume slider to the volume level  
you desire (range is 0-7).  
2. Touch drop-down menu (upper-right of the screen) and  
select Phone.  
3. Touch the Keypad Tone pull-down and select one of the  
7. Touch Save to return to the Sound Profiles menu.  
following tones and touch Save  
:
• Beep  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Touch the Vibration Pattern field, then touch to select  
Vibration 1 - 5 and touch Save  
Outdoor Profile  
.
In this case, you are outdoors and might not be able to hear the  
phone, or need an increased volume in order to hear the phone.  
For example, you might be jogging and need the phone to vibrate  
and ring loudly.  
7. Touch Save to return to the Sound Profiles menu.  
Editing the Outdoor - Message Profile  
1. Touch  
➔
Settings  
➔
Sound Profile  
➔
Outdoor.  
Editing the Outdoor - Call Profile  
•
Touch the name field and not the radio button to the right.  
1. Touch  
➔
Settings  
➔
Sound Profile  
➔
Outdoor.  
2. Touch drop-down menu (upper-right of the screen) and  
•
Touch the name field and not the radio button to the right.  
select Message.  
2. Touch drop-down menu (upper-right of the screen) and  
3. Touch the Message Alert Type field, select one of the  
select Call.  
following and touch Save  
:
3. Select the Call Alert Type field and select one of the  
• Melody: the phone rings using the ring melody selected in the Ring  
following and touch Save  
:
tone menu.  
• Melody: the phone rings using the ring melody selected in the Ring  
tone menu.  
• Vibration: the phone vibrates but does not ring.  
• Vibration & Melody: the phone vibrates and plays a melody  
simultaneously.  
• Vibration then Melody: the phone vibrates and then starts ringing.  
• Vibration & Melody: the phone vibrates and plays a melody  
simultaneously.  
• Mute: the phone is silent and does not play a melody or vibrate.  
4. Touch the Message Alert Tone field, then touch to select  
4. Touch the Voice Call Ringtone field, touch to select a  
Message Tone 1 - 4 and touch Save  
.
ringtone and touch Save  
.
5. Touch the Message Alert Repetition pull-down and select  
5. Drag the Ringtone Volume slider to the volume level you  
one of the following options and touch Save  
:
desire (range is 1-7).  
• Once: repeats the message alert once.  
Changing Your Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
57  
 
• Periodic: repeats the message alert periodically.  
6. Drag the Alert Tone Volume slider to the volume level you  
desire (range is 1-7).  
• Vibration: the phone vibrates but does not play a melody.  
• Vibration & Melody: the phone vibrates and plays a melody  
simultaneously.  
• Mute: the phone is silent and does not play a melody or vibrate.  
7. Touch the Vibration Pattern field, then touch to select  
5. Touch the Power Off Type field, select one of the following  
Vibration 1 - 3 and touch Save  
.
and touch Save  
:
8. Touch Save to return to the Sound Profiles menu.  
• Melody: the phone rings using the ring melody selected in the Ring  
tone menu.  
Editing the Outdoor - Phone Profile  
• Vibration: the phone vibrates but does not ring.  
1. Touch  
➔
Settings  
➔
Sound Profile  
➔
Outdoor.  
• Vibration & Melody: the phone vibrates and plays a melody  
•
Touch the name field and not the radio button to the right.  
simultaneously.  
2. Touch drop-down menu (upper-right of the screen) and  
• Mute: the phone is silent and does not play a melody or vibrate.  
6. Drag the Phone Sound Volume slider to the volume level  
you desire (range is 0-7).  
select Phone.  
3. Touch the Keypad Tone pull-down and select one of the  
following tones and touch Save  
:
•
Touch Save to return to the Sound Profiles menu.  
• Beep  
• Glossy  
• Mute  
Display and Light Settings  
In this menu, you can change various settings for the display or  
backlight.  
4. Touch the Power On Type field, select one of the following  
and touch Save  
1. From Idle mode, touch  
Light  
2. Select one of the following options:  
Wallpaper  
➔
Settings  
➔
Display and  
:
.
• Melody: the phone rings using the ring melody selected in the Ring  
tone menu.  
•
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
•
•
•
•
•
•
Widget  
Widget  
Font Type  
Allows you to select which widget applications will appear  
docked within the Widget bar on the Idle screen.  
Greeting Message  
Transition Effect  
Brightness  
For more information, refer to “Widgets” on page 21.  
Font Type  
Backlight Time  
You can select the text style for the informational text displayed  
on the Main LCD.  
Wallpaper  
This menu allows you to change the background image displayed  
on the screen.  
1. From Idle mode, touch  
Light Font Type  
2. Select Type1 Type2 or Type3 and touch Save  
➔
Settings  
➔
Display and  
➔
.
1. From Idle mode, touch  
Light Wallpaper.  
➔
Settings  
➔
Display and  
,
.
➔
Greeting Message  
2. Drag an onscreen image to the left or right to view either  
the next or previously available images (located in your  
Pictures folder) for the wallpaper selection.  
In this menu you enter the text which displays on the screen  
when the phone powers on.  
1. From Idle mode, touch  
Light Greeting Message.  
➔
Settings  
➔
Display and  
3. Touch one of the following options:  
➔
•
Set: assigns the current image as the new wallpaper image that  
appears when the screen.  
2. Touch and hold  
to erase the current greeting  
message.  
• Pictures: allows you to choose a photo from Pictures folder, that  
are displayed in a thumbnail view.  
3. Use either the onscreen keypad/keyboard to enter a new  
greeting.  
OK  
4. Touch  
.
Changing Your Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
59  
Transition Effect  
locks. For more information, refer to “Locking and Unlocking the  
Phone” on page 18.  
Allows you to activate/deactivate the default transition effect  
(wipe) during transitions between menu/options pages.  
1. From Idle mode, touch  
➔
Settings  
➔
Display and  
Light ➔ Backlight Time.  
1. From Idle mode, touch  
➔
Settings  
➔
Display and  
Light ➔ Transition Effect.  
2. Touch one of the backlight times to set the amount of time  
the phone’s touchscreen remains lit without activity.  
2. Touch either On (activate) or Off (deactivate).  
Options include: 8 Seconds  
,
15 Seconds, 30 Seconds,  
Brightness  
1 Minute 3 Minutes, or 10 Minutes).  
,
Allows you to adjust the display brightness for the LCD to see  
better within different lighting conditions.  
Save  
3. Touch  
.
1. From Idle mode, touch  
➔
Settings  
➔
Display and  
Note: Modifying this setting will impact your battery life.  
Light ➔ Brightness.  
Time & Date  
2. Drag the Level slider to the brightness level you desire  
(range is 1-5).  
This menu allows you to change the current time and date  
displayed.  
Save  
3. Touch  
.
1. From Idle mode, touch  
➔
Settings  
➔
Time and Date.  
Note: Modifying this setting will impact your battery life.  
2. Touch the Time Zone Updating drop-down list and select  
one of the following:  
Backlight Time  
•
Automatic: the phone automatically updates the time and date  
according to the current time zone using the network service.  
The backlight turns the screen on using a preset brightness level.  
When the time (set in this feature) runs out, the touch screen  
•
Manual Only: you need to manually set the time and date  
according to the current time zone using the Set time menu.  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
•
Prompt First: you are prompted before a time change is applied.  
3. Touch the Time Zone field and assign a new time zone by  
touching a corresponding area of the world map.  
OK  
to save the new setting.  
•
•
•
Touch  
Major cities in each zone are displayed upon selection.  
Current time zones are based upon Greenwich Mean Time.  
Hour  
Minute  
4. Touch 12hr (12 hour) or 24hr (24 hour) from the Time  
Format field.  
5. Touch the Time field then adjust the hour and minutes  
values by using either the up/down input arrows or by  
quickly sliding your fingertip over the numbers to scroll  
through their available values.  
•
•
Touch either AM or PM.  
6. Touch the Date Format pull-down list and select the format  
Set  
Touch  
to complete the assignment.  
in which you want the date to display.  
7. Touch the Date field then adjust the Month Day, and Year  
,
values by using either the up/down input arrows or by  
quickly sliding your fingertip over the numbers to scroll  
through their available values.  
Set  
•
Touch  
to complete the assignment.  
8. Touch Save to store all the new Time and Date settings.  
Changing Your Settings  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Vibration Feedback  
Phone Settings  
You can customize various phone settings.  
You can set the level of intensity at which you want the vibration  
mode.  
ᮣ
From Idle mode, touch  
➔
Settings  
➔
Phone.  
1. From Idle mode, touch  
Vibration Feedback  
➔
Settings  
➔
Phone  
➔
Language  
.
This menu allows you to select a display language for Text  
language and Text Input mode. Choose from Automatic, English,  
Français, and Español.  
2. Drag the Vibration Intensity slider to the intensity level you  
desire (range is 0-4).  
1. From Idle mode, touch  
Language  
➔
Settings  
➔
Phone  
➔
3. Touch Save  
.
.
Calibration  
2. Touch the Screen Text drop-down list, touch one of the  
The Calibration feature allows you to re-align the screen’s touch  
accuracy. Use this feature only when the device does not respond  
properly when you touch the screen.  
Save  
following selections and touch  
:
• Automatic (uses the language set on your SIM card).  
1. From Idle mode, touch  
Calibration  
➔
Settings  
➔
Phone  
➔
• English  
• Français  
• Español  
.
2. Touch the center of each target and repeat this step for all  
3. Touch the Input Language drop-down list, touch one of the  
four targets displayed.  
Save  
following selections and touch  
:
3. Touch OK from the New settings saved... display page.  
• English  
• Français  
• Español  
Note: When touching the screen in Calibration mode, you must touch the  
center of the cross hair area.  
4. Touch  
to return to Phone settings page.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
62  
     
Lock SIM Card  
Auto Keypad Lock  
1. From Idle mode, touch  
➔
Settings  
➔
Phone.  
When the Lock SIM Card feature is enabled, your phone only  
works with the current SIM. You must enter the lock code to  
unlock the SIM so you can use a different SIM card. Once you  
have entered the lock code, you are asked to confirm your  
password.  
2. Touch On or Off from the Auto Keypad Lock field.  
Phone Security  
The Security feature enables you to restrict the use of your phone  
by others and to restrict the types of calls.  
ᮣ
Touch On or Off from the Lock SIM Card field.  
Various codes and passwords are used to protect the features of  
your phone.  
Note: This lock code is typically the last four digits of the current phone  
number or can be obtained from an AT&T customer service  
representative.  
ᮣ
From Idle mode, touch  
➔
Settings  
➔
Phone  
➔
Security.  
Lock Phone  
Check PIN code  
When the Phone Lock phone feature is enabled, the phone is  
locked and you must enter the 4 to 8 digit phone password each  
time the phone is switched on.  
When the Check PIN code feature is enabled, you must enter  
your PIN each time you switch on the phone. Consequently, any  
person who does not have your PIN cannot use your phone  
without your approval.  
Note: You will be prompted to create a password the first time this feature is  
enabled.  
ᮣ
Touch On or Off from the Check PIN Code field.  
To change the phone password, see “Change Phone Password”  
on page 64. Once you enter the correct password, you can use  
the phone until you switch it off.  
Note: You can obtain your PIN from an AT&T customer service representative.  
Lock Applications  
ᮣ
Touch On or Off from the Lock Phone field.  
Using this menu, you can lock your applications and media  
contents (apps, messages, images, and sounds) from being  
accidentally accessed, altered or deleted. Once you lock the  
Changing Your Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
63  
           
contents, you must enter the phone’s password to access the  
associated menus.  
numbers stored in the FDN list on the SIM card. For more  
information, refer to “FDN Mode” on page 85.  
1. Touch On or Off from the Fixed Dialing Mode field.  
Note: The first time you access the password screen, you will be prompted to  
• On: you can only call phone numbers stored in the Address Book.  
You must enter your PIN2 to continue this configuration. You can  
obtain your PIN2 from AT&T’s customer service department.  
create a password.  
1. Touch the Lock Applications field.  
• Off: you can call any number.  
2. Touch the check box next to each application you wish to  
2. Use the onscreen keypad to enter your PIN2 Code and  
lock, or touch All to select all applications.  
touch  
.
•
Applications include: Messaging, My Stuff, Recent Calls, Address  
Book, Calendar, Memo, IM, and Tasks.  
Note: The PIN2 code is provided by AT&T. Entering an incorrect PIN2 code  
can cause the phone to lock, at which point, you will have to call AT&T  
customer service for assistance.  
Save  
•
Touch  
to store your new selections.  
3. Enter a new password (during the first use) using the  
onscreen keypad into the New Password field and touch  
Change Phone Password  
.
The Change password feature allows you to change your current  
phone password to a new one. You must enter the current  
password before you can specify a new one.  
4. Enter the new password again and touch  
.
Note: To change this password, see “Change Phone Password” on page 64.  
1. Touch the Change Phone Password field.  
2. Enter the current phone password and touch  
.
Fixed Dialing Mode  
FDN (Fixed Dial Number) mode, if supported by your SIM card,  
restricts your outgoing calls to a limited set of phone numbers.  
When this feature is enabled, you can make calls only to phone  
Note: Initially, the phone will not have a password assigned, and step 2 will  
not be necessary. Once a password is assigned, all steps are  
necessary.  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3. Enter the new password and touch  
.
Note: Not all SIM cards have a PIN2. If your SIM card does not, this menu  
does not display.  
4. Re-enter the same password and touch  
.
1. Touch the Change PIN2 Code field.  
Note: If you change your password, be sure to write it down and keep it in a  
safe place. If you forget your password, your phone will require AT&T  
customer service to have it unlocked.  
2. Use the onscreen keypad/keyboard to enter your PIN2  
code and touch  
.
Change PIN code  
3. Enter the new PIN2 code and touch  
.
This feature allows you to change your current PIN, provided that  
the PIN check feature is enabled. The Check Pin Code field must  
be active before you can access this function (page 63).  
4. Re-enter (reconfirm) the same code and touch  
.
APN Control  
This feature allows you to turn control of Access Point Names  
(APN) On or Off. APNs are a method by which you can access  
advanced communication using your handset. This advanced  
communication can include instant messaging, multimedia  
messaging, email, and Internet access. Turning On APN Control  
requires the PIN2 code.  
Note: This code is provided by AT&T. Entering an incorrect code can cause  
the phone to lock, at which point, you will have to call AT&T customer  
service for assistance.  
1. Touch the Change PIN Code field.  
2. Enter your PIN code and touch Save  
.
1. Touch On or Off from the APN Control field.  
Change PIN2 code  
2. Press  
to return to the previous Phone settings page.  
The Change PIN2 code feature allows you to change your current  
PIN2 to a new one. You must first enter the current PIN2  
(obtained from AT&T) before you can specify a new one. Once  
you have entered a new PIN2, you are asked to confirm it by  
entering it again.  
Reset phone  
The Reset feature allows you to set your phone options back to  
the factory defaults.  
1. From Idle mode, touch  
➔
Settings  
➔
Phone  
➔
Reset  
Changing Your Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
65  
 
phone  
.
or receive any calls or access online information. The (  
appears in place of the signal strength indicator when active.  
1. From Idle mode, touch Settings Phone  
) icon  
2. At the “All settings reset to factory defaults. Continue?”  
prompt, touch Yes to reset, or No to cancel. Once your  
phone has been reset to its default settings for those  
selected options, it will restart itself in order to incorporate  
the new settings.  
➔
➔
.
2. Touch On or Off from the Airplane Mode field.  
3. Press  
to return to the previous Phone settings page.  
Call Settings  
Restore phone  
ᮣ
From Idle mode, touch  
➔
Settings  
➔
Calls.  
The Restore feature allows you to delete any user information  
that has been added, in addition to setting your phone options  
back to the factory defaults.  
Adjusting the General Call Settings  
1. Touch General and select from the following options:  
• Show My Number: allows you to select how your caller ID is  
handled when an outgoing call is initiated. This is what  
others see on their Caller ID screen. This value can be  
made blank if you do not wish your number displayed to  
other users.  
1. From Idle mode, touch  
Restore phone  
➔
Settings  
➔
Phone  
➔
.
2. At the “All settings reset to factory defaults and all user data  
will be deleted. Continue?” prompt, touch Yes to reset, or  
No to cancel.  
• Auto Reject: selects which numbers will be automatically sent to  
voicemail based on a user-created list from within the Reject List  
.
• Call Answer: selects how your phone answers incoming calls.  
Selections are: Green Key, Open Slide, Any Key, and Automatic  
(Time - 1-5 seconds).  
Airplane Mode  
Airplane Mode allows you to use many of your phone’s features,  
such as Games, Voice note, etc., when you are in an airplane or  
in any other area where making or receiving calls or data is  
prohibited. When your phone is in Airplane Mode, it cannot send  
• Auto Reply: sets up an automatic text message that is sent to the  
calling party when they call you.  
–
Touch either On or Off to activate/deactivate the function.  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
–
If active (On), touch the Reply to Send field and use the onscreen  
keypad/keyboard to enter an auto reply message.  
–
–
Unreachable activates an automatic forward of all incoming calls only  
when you can not be reached and your phone status is set to  
unreachable.  
• Call Status Tones: allows you to activate an alert tone for one of  
two available status categories. Touch an option to make your  
Cancel All cancels all call forwarding functions.  
selection and then touch  
Options include:  
to store your new selection.  
Save  
• Call Waiting: this network service informs you when someone is  
trying to reach you during another call. You can specify individual  
call waiting options for voice calls and/or data calls.  
–
Call Connect Tone: allows you to activate an alert tone when the a  
connection has been made.  
–
Touch of the available options: Activate  
,
Deactivate, Check Status  
–
Minute Minder: allows you to activate an alert tone which sounds  
(checks the status of this service on your account).  
every minute the call is active.  
• Auto Redial: the phone automatically redials the last active number  
• Alerts on Call: activates an alert tone for new messages being  
received during an active call. Touch to store setting.  
if the call was either cut off or you were unable to connect.  
Save  
–
–
Touch either On or Off to activate/deactivate the function.  
2. Press  
twice return to the previous Phone settings  
Save  
Touch  
to store the new setting.  
page.  
2. Press  
twice return to the previous Phone settings  
page.  
Adjusting the Voice Call Settings  
Connectivity  
1. Touch Voice Call and select from the following options:  
The phone has several communication/connection parameters  
which can be edited.  
• Call Forwarding: incoming calls are re-routed to a secondary  
number that you specify. Select the condition for the call forward  
action:  
Bluetooth  
–
–
–
Forward Always activates an automatic forward of all incoming calls  
regardless of condition.  
Bluetooth is a short-range wireless communications technology  
capable of exchanging information over a distance of about 30  
feet without requiring a physical connection. Unlike infrared, you  
don't need to line up the devices to beam information with  
Bluetooth. If the devices are within a range of one another, you  
Busy activates an forward function only when your number is currently  
in use and the caller receives a busy signal.  
No Reply activates an automatic forward of all incoming calls after a  
preset amount of time (5 seconds - 30 seconds).  
Changing Your Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
67  
   
can exchange information between them, even if they are located  
in different rooms. The following Bluetooth options are available:  
Device Name  
1. From Idle mode, touch  
➔
Settings  
➔
Connectivity  
➔
Activation  
Bluetooth  
➔
My Info.  
1. From Idle mode, touch  
Bluetooth  
➔
Settings  
➔
Connectivity  
➔
2. Touch the Name field, touch and hold  
to erase the  
.
current name.  
2. Touch the onscreen Phone icon to activate or deactivate  
3. Use the onscreen keypad/keyboard to enter the new name  
Bluetooth.  
– or –  
OK  
for this device and touch  
. For more information,  
refer to “Entering Text” on page 40.  
Touch  
➔
Turn Bluetooth On/Off.  
Save  
4. Touch  
.
Phone’s Visibility  
1. From Idle mode, touch  
Bluetooth Visible  
➔
Settings  
➔
Connectivity  
➔
➔
.
2. Touch Yes or No to enable or disable the visibility  
(discoverability) of your phone.  
•
Your phone becomes visible to other devices when you transmit  
your device’s name to others in your area. This allows other devices  
to detect your phone and request a connection. If your phone is not  
visible, you can still detect and connect to other devices, while still  
hiding yourself from others.  
Bluetooth  
Inactive  
Bluetooth  
Active  
Connecting to Other Bluetooth Devices  
Settings  
1. From Idle mode, touch  
➔
➔
Connectivity  
➔
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Bluetooth  
➔
Search  
.
1. From Idle mode, touch  
Bluetooth My Info  
2. Touch On or Off from the Remote SIM Control field.  
3. Touch Save  
➔
Settings  
➔
Connectivity  
➔
➔
.
•
Detected Bluetooth devices then appear as buttons on the  
Bluetooth page.  
2. Touch the desired device to begin pairing.  
.
3. Touch the Passkey field, enter the passkey used by the  
Bluetooth Services  
OK  
target device and touch  
.
The Bluetooth specification is a protocol that describes how the  
short-range wireless technology works, whereas services  
describe the individual devices that are supported. These  
services reduce the chance that incompatible devices are  
allowed to connect to your phone.  
OK  
4. Select a connection option and touch  
.
5. Once the target device accepts the pair your new device  
shows as connected (green) within the Bluetooth page.  
Bluetooth Secure Mode  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Headset: the Bluetooth headset enables both incoming and outgoing  
calls using the Bluetooth headsets.  
When the Bluetooth Visibility is turned on, your phone is  
wirelessly transmitting its phone name and status to every device  
within its range. This transmission can pose a security risk and  
incite unauthorized connection to your phone. It is recommended  
that you remain hidden unless necessary.  
Handsfree: the Bluetooth car kit enables both incoming and outgoing  
calls.  
Bluetooth Stereo Headset: used to make calls and listen to music  
through the Bluetooth stereo headset.  
Remote SIM mode  
Serial Port: used to connect to other Bluetooth devices through a  
virtual serial port.  
This mode allows you to turn On or Off Remote SIM Mode.  
Remote SIM mode, when set to On, allows the Bluetooth phone  
car kit to access the contact information stored on the SIM card.  
Dial up: used to provide Internet access for Bluetooth devices through  
the phone’s modem.  
Basic Printing: used to print images, text messages, personal data  
such as namecards and appointments, etc. through a remote  
Bluetooth printer.  
Note: There is a risk that another Bluetooth device (user) can access and  
modify your SIM card features and data.  
Changing Your Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
69  
 
•
•
File transfer: used to transfer files to and from Bluetooth devices.  
Object Push: used to exchange personal data (namecards, Address  
Book contacts, etc.) with Bluetooth devices.  
• Mass Storage: allows you to utilize the onboard storage capacity of  
the phone to store and upload files. This option allows your  
computer to detect the phone as a removable storage drive.  
• Install PC Studio: allows you to automatically install PC Studio the  
first time the phone recognizes a USB connection.  
•
SIM Access: provides access to the SIM card on the phone.  
Configuring Your Phone’s USB Settings  
Save  
3. Touch  
.
This menu selects the method of communication for the USB  
port.  
Network Profile Configuration  
Your phone is wirelessly connecting to the Internet via a built in  
WAP browser. Connection can be made via either one of three  
available WAP browsers: MEdia Net, AT&T MMS (MultiMedia  
Server), and AT&T IMS. You need these settings to use the web  
browser or send MMS messages or Emails.  
Note: The Bluetooth feature must first be disabled before initiating a USB  
connection with the phone. Prior to connecting the USB cable to the  
phone, install the latest version of the PC Studio application. This  
application installs the necessary USB drivers onto your machine. For a  
free download of PC Studio, go to www.samsung.com/us/support.  
Use this menu to create and customize the profiles containing the  
settings for connecting your phone to the network. Although the  
active connection can be changed by the user, it is recommended  
that this choice be made with the assistance of either the retailer  
or customer service representative.  
1. From Idle mode, touch  
Select USB Mode  
2. Select one of the following USB modes:  
➔
Settings  
➔
Connectivity  
➔
.
• Ask on Connection: causes the phone to present a “Select USB  
Mode” pop-up when you connect to the PC. You can then choose  
1. From Idle mode, touch  
Network Profiles  
➔
Settings  
➔
Connectivity  
➔
from either: PC Studio  
,
Media Player Mass Storage, or Install PC  
,
.
Studio  
.
2. Touch one of these options:  
• Samsung PC Studio: sets PC Studio to launch as the default  
application when a USB connection is detected.  
• MEdia Net  
• AT&T MMS  
• AT&T IMS  
• Media Player: sets the Media Player to launch as the default  
application when a USB connection is detected.  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
• Advanced Settings: allows you to configure some of the IP-specific  
information: Static IP, Static DNS, Server information, and Traffic  
Class.  
Note: The MEdia Net WAP and AT&T MMS are pre-configured and cannot be  
altered on this screen. Your phone is set up by default for connecting to  
the network.  
–
–
–
Static IP: specify if you want to manually enter an IP address. If you  
want the IP address to be automatically assigned by the server, remove  
the check mark.  
Create  
3. To create a new connection, touch  
.
4. Select the parameter you want to edit:  
Static DNS: specify if you want to manually enter the Domain Name  
Server (DNS) address. If you want the address to be automatically  
assigned by the server, remove the check mark.  
• Set Name: enter a profile name.  
• Access Name: edit the access point name.  
Traffic Class: select the traffic class.  
• Auth Type: select the type of authentication used for this WAP  
connection: None, Normal, or Secure.  
Note: The WAP settings may vary depending on the service provider.  
• User ID: enter the User ID required to connect to the network.  
Save  
• Password: enter the user password required to connect to the  
5. Touch  
to store these new settings.  
network.  
IMS Settings  
• Protocol: set the connection protocol used by the WAP browser:  
WAP, HTTP, or Other.  
IMS is the method used to connect to the server in order set up  
the Video Share option.  
• Home URL: enter the URL address of the page to be used as your  
homepage.  
1. From Idle mode, touch  
IMS Settings  
2. Touch one of these options:  
• IMS Service allows you to set the IMS service to On or Off  
Touch to store the new setting.  
➔
Settings  
➔
Connectivity  
➔
• Proxy Address: MEdia Net set as the proxy server address and  
port.  
.
• Linger Time (sec.): set a time period (in seconds) after which the  
network is disconnected if there has been no new data traffic in that  
time.  
.
Save  
Changing Your Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
71  
 
• Calendar (see page 73)  
Important!: If you reset the IMS Service to Off, you will not be able to use the  
• Address Book (see page 79).  
Video Share Option.  
Video Share Settings  
• IMS Profiles allows you to set the server that service is coming  
To enable the Alerts, Auto Record, and Recording Location for  
Video Share, use the following steps.  
from. Select a profile, make your alterations, and touch  
to store the new setting.  
Save  
1. From Idle mode, touch  
Settings Video Share  
➔
Settings ➔ Applications  
Important!: If you change from the default AT&T IMS, you may not be able to  
➔
.
use Video Sharing.  
2. Activate any of the following options by touching the  
Applications Settings  
onscreen button.  
The Applications Settings feature allows you to configure the  
functional parameters for most of the onboard applications.  
These applications are described in more detail within other  
sections of this manual.  
•
Audio Alert: allows you to turn On or Off the Video Share Alerts  
which displays a message and a tone.  
•
Auto Record: allows you to turn On or Off the Auto Record which  
records the Video Share call.  
1. From Idle mode, touch  
➔
Settings ➔ Applications  
• Recording Location: allows you to set whether video recorded is  
stored on the Phone or on the microSD Memory Card  
Settings.  
.
Save  
3. Touch  
.
2. Select the type of application which you want to change:  
• Messaging (see page 108)  
• Browser (see page 144)  
• Music Player (see page 122)  
• CV (see page 76)  
Record Audio Settings  
To configure the filename and maximum length for a recording.  
1. From Idle mode, touch  
Settings Record Audio  
➔
Settings ➔ Applications  
➔
.
• Video Share (see page 72)  
• Record Audio (see page 72)  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
2. Touch either of the following fields and edit the  
Address Book Settings  
information:  
To configure your Address Book application.  
•
Default Name: allows you to use the onscreen keyboard to enter a  
1. From Idle mode, touch  
Settings Address Book  
➔
Settings ➔ Applications  
prefix name of all recorded audio files. Touch  
new name.  
to store the  
OK  
➔
.
2. Touch one of the following fields and edit the information:  
•
Recording Time: allows you to choose the maximum limit allowed  
for the recorded audio file (1 Minute, 2, Minutes, 3 Minutes,  
4 Minutes, 5 Minutes, 60 Minutes, or Limit for MMS).  
• My Business Card: attaches a user created virtual business card  
as an attachment to outgoing messages.  
Save  
3. Touch  
.
• Save New Contacts to: defines the destination for new contact  
entries (Phone or SIM Card).  
Calendar Settings  
• View Contacts from: to filter the display of current Address Book  
entries. Options include: All, Phone, or SIM Card.  
To configure the starting day and view used when opening the  
Calendar application.  
• Own Number: to display your current phone number.  
1. From Idle mode, touch  
Settings Calendar  
➔
Settings ➔ Applications  
• Fixed Dial Contacts: assigns phone numbers as FDN entries.  
➔
.
• UsedSpace: displays the memory storage allocation (total available  
and remaining) within both your Phone, SIM card, and FDN list.  
2. Touch either of the following fields and edit the  
Save  
3. Touch  
.
information:  
Memory Management  
•
Starting Day: allows you choose which day mark the first day in  
your calendar week (Sunday or Monday).  
You can easily check the amount of memory being used for  
storing data, such as messages, media, calendar data, or  
contacts entries. You can also delete any selected information  
from your phone:  
•
View by: allows you to choose the default view for appointments  
used by the Calendar application when launched (Month, Week, or  
Day).  
Save  
3. Touch  
.
1. From Idle mode, touch  
➔
Settings  
➔
Memory  
Changing Your Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
73  
         
Management  
.
Memory Card Details  
Allows you to view specific information related to the current  
microSD card being used for storage.  
2. Touch any of the following options:  
•
•
Clear Phone Memory  
Memory Card Details  
ᮣ
From Idle mode, touch  
➔
Settings  
➔
Memory  
Management Memory Card Details.  
➔
• Used Space  
Clear Phone Memory  
Note: Memory card is optional.  
From this menu you can clear the memory for Files, Messages,  
Address Book entries, Calendar entries, Tasks, Memos, or All  
licenses. You can all select All to clear everything listed.  
Check the Used Space  
1. From Idle mode, touch  
Management ➔ Used Space.  
➔
Settings  
➔
Memory  
Note: To completely remove any personal information stored on your device,  
see “Warranty Information” on page 212.  
2. Select one of the following storage categories to view the  
contents of a category’s memory:  
1. From Idle mode, touch  
➔
Settings  
➔
Memory  
• Shared Memory  
• Messaging  
• My Stuff  
Management Clear Phone Memory.  
➔
2. Place a checkmark alongside those applications you wish  
to clear by touching individual applications  
– or –  
• Calendar  
• Tasks  
touch All to clear all the memory settings.  
• Memo  
Clear  
3. Touch  
.
• Address Book  
3. When you are finished, press  
to return to Idle  
screen.  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Software Update  
The Software Update feature enables you to use your phone to  
connect to the network and upload any new phone software  
directly to your phone.  
1. From Idle mode, touch  
Update  
➔
Settings  
➔
Software  
.
2. Follow the on screen instructions.  
Phone Information  
This option allows you to see the phone number on the SIM card  
(within the phone), the manufacturer, and the model number.  
This information may be necessary if talking to Customer Service  
in the event of a problem.  
1. From Idle mode, touch  
➔
Settings ➔ Phone  
Information.  
2. When you are finished, press  
to return to Idle  
screen.  
Changing Your Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
75  
       
Section 7: Cellular Video  
Your phone is equipped with a WAP (Wireless Application  
Protocol) browser which allows you to access the Internet and  
download media files directly to your phone. These media files  
are displayed using the built-in Media Player. Cellular Video (CV)  
is a media service which allows you to stream media content  
(Weather, News, Sports highlights, etc.) directly to your phone.  
• Help: provides basic on-line assistance which answers most of the  
common issues users come across while using this feature.  
2. Select from one of the available categories by touching an  
option.  
Viewing a Video Clip  
1. In Idle mode, touch  
➔
My Stuff  
➔
CV.  
1. In Idle mode, touch  
➔
My Stuff  
➔
CV to launch the  
2. Select the video clip by touching the entry from within the  
default CV homepage. This homepage provides you with  
access to content categories & settings:  
Favorites section.  
• My Favorites: allows you to choose from some recently uploaded  
video clips from among the following media providers: CNN, ESPN,  
HBO Mobile Preview, or Access Hollywood.  
3. After the stream has been buffered into memory, you can  
choose to either pause or play the content.  
•
•
Touch the Pause/Play button to toggle between the two functions.  
Touch the Exit button to be taken back to the CV homepage.  
• Video Categories: provides some general content categories from  
which to begin searching for media: Entertainment, Sports, News &  
Weather, Music, Kids & Cartoons & HBO Mobile.  
Using the Video Categories  
• Customize CV: allows you to access the CV Settings menu where  
you can configure most of the settings associated with CV.  
This grouping of media categories provides access to an  
additional listing of streaming media. Where the previous  
Favorites list of media stream can be user edited and updated,  
this list of categories is defined by CV’s homepage and cannot be  
changed.  
• Parental Controls: provides you with settings which can be  
configured to restrict certain media content from being displayed on  
the phone.  
• MEdia Net: exits from the CV application and launches the MEdia  
Net homepage.  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
2. Touch the red circle next to any of the available alert  
services listed within the Add to My Alerts section of the  
page (ex: Breaking News).  
Customizing CV  
Updating the Favorites List  
The list of media providers which appear in the Favorites section  
of the CV homepage can be edited and changed by the user.  
My Purchases  
1. In Idle mode, touch  
➔
My Stuff  
➔
CV  
➔
The CV homepage can be used to shop for streaming multimedia  
content. The My Purchases section can help keep track of your  
purchase history and view any new resale products.  
Customize Mobile Video ➔ Edit My Favorites. The  
screen is composed of two sections:  
1. In Idle mode, touch  
➔
My Stuff  
➔
CV  
➔
➔
•
Manage My Favorites: lists the current Favorites list and gives you  
the option of opening the page or deleting it from your Favorites.  
Customize Mobile Video ➔ My Purchases  
Purchase  
•
Add to Favorites: selecting an item moves it to the Favorites list.  
History. This provides you with an on screen listing of your  
2. Do one of the following:  
“to date” purchase history for media content.  
•
•
•
Touch  
Touch  
Touch  
to delete a Favorite.  
2. Touch My Account. This provides you with an onscreen  
to move the Favorite Up  
.
description of your account details.  
to move an item to the Favorites.  
Parental Controls  
Adding a Video Alert  
Your phone can be configured to block both purchased and  
streamed media content. Before filtering, you must first establish  
a pin/password and a contact e-mail address. Once those have  
been established, you can the two available filter options:  
When new media is available for upload to your phone (such as  
breaking news), you can set your phone to notify you of the new  
available content.  
1. In Idle mode, touch  
Customize Mobile Video ➔ My Video Alerts ➔ Add to My  
Alerts  
➔
My Stuff  
➔
CV  
➔
•
Content Filters: let you restrict access to inappropriate content both  
on and outside of MEdia Net.  
.
Cellular Video  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
•
Purchase Blocker: lets you restrict the ability to buy ringtones,  
downloads, games, etc., from MEdia Net on this phone.  
Setting up Parental Controls  
1. In Idle mode, touch  
➔
My Stuff  
➔
CV ➔ Customize  
Mobile Video ➔ Parental Controls to access the MEdia Net  
parental setup fields.  
2. Touch each of the following fields and use the onscreen  
keypad/keyboard to enter the information: PIN  
,
Re-enter,  
contact email address  
.
3. Touch Save and allow a few minutes for your information to  
be received and accepted by MEdia Net. You can then use  
this information to activate the parental filters.  
Configuring the Filters  
1. In Idle mode, touch  
➔
My Stuff  
➔
CV ➔ Customize  
Mobile Video ➔ Parental Controls  
➔
Enter PIN ➔ Go ➔  
Change Settings ➔ Content Filters ➔ Save.  
2. Touch Purchase Blocker ➔ Save button to toggle the On/  
Off state.  
3. Touch OK to activate the filter.  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Section 8: Understanding Your Address Book  
This section allows you to manage your daily contacts by storing  
their name and number in your Address Book. Address Book  
entries can be sorted by name, entry, or group.  
• UsedSpace: displays the memory storage allocation (total available  
and remaining) within both your Phone, SIM card, and FDN list  
(page 90).  
Adding a New Contact  
Use the following procedure to store a new contact to your  
Address Book.  
Note: When storing an Address Book entry into your SIM card, note that only  
the name, phone number, group, and slot location are initially offered  
as fields (some SIM cards may allow an address as well). Although you  
may add additional fields to a SIM entry; if you move that same SIM  
card to another model phone, it is possible that only the basic  
information will be transferred.  
Saving a Number from the Idle screen  
Create Contact  
1. Touch  
➔
. This opens the Add New Contact  
screen.  
Address Book Settings  
1. Touch  
➔
Address Book  
➔
Address Book Settings.  
2. Touch the image icon and assign a picture to the new entry  
by choosing one of three options:  
2. Touch any of the following options to activate a function:  
• Remove although not an option with a new entry, deletes any  
previously assigned image.  
• My Business Card: attaches a user created virtual business card  
as an attachment to outgoing messages.  
• Take Photo to use the camera to take a new picture and assign it  
to this entry.  
• Save New Contacts to: defines the destination for new contact  
entries (Phone or SIM Card) (page 88).  
• Caller Image to retrieve a previously stored image from your  
Pictures folder and assign it to this entry. Select an image and touch  
Add to assign the image and return to the previous Add New  
Contact screen.  
• View Contacts from: to filter the display of current Address Book  
entries. Options include: All, Phone, or SIM Card (page 83).  
• Own Number: to display your current phone number (page 85).  
• Fixed Dial Contacts: assigns phone numbers as FDN entries  
(page 85).  
Understanding Your Address Book  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
79  
                 
3. Touch the First Name  
,
Last Name, and Display Name fields  
• Ringtone: assigns a ringtone for this contact information. Choose  
from Tones Music, or Recorded Audio categories. Touch a music  
,
and use the onscreen keyboard to enter names for the new  
file to play a short sample and then touch Add to complete the  
assignment.  
OK  
entry, and touch  
. (For more information, refer to  
“Entering Text” on page 40.)  
• Vibration: assigns a vibration type for this contact information.  
Touch a setting (Vibration 1 - 5) to be provided with a sample.  
Touch Save to complete the assignment.  
• First Name: allows you enter a first name for this entry.  
• Last Name: allows you enter a Last name for this entry.  
• Birthday: assigns a calendar date for the contacts birthday. Touch  
Save to store the new date. For more information, refer to  
“Scrolling Through Field Entries” on page 21.  
• Display Name: allows you enter a display name for this entry which  
then appears when you receive a call from this contact.  
4. Touch the Phone Number field and use the onscreen  
• Note: allows you enter notes associated with this contact. For more  
information, refer to “Entering Text” on page 40.  
keypad to enter the phone number for the entry, and  
Save  
7. Touch  
to store the new entry into the Address  
OK  
touch  
.
Book.  
•
To add more than two phone numbers, press Add More Fields  
,
check Mobile, then press Done  
.
Note: If the Contact has multiple phone numbers, set the default number by  
pressing More Mark as Default, select the desired number, and then  
press Done  
5. Touch  
to change the category type of the entry.  
➔
.
Choose from among: Mobile Home, Work, Fax, or Others.  
,
6. Use your fingertip to scroll down the screen and touch any  
Note: By default, Contacts are saved on the phone. To copy them to a SIM  
of the remaining fields to update their information. Touch  
card, see “Copying an Entry to the SIM Card” on page 88.  
OK  
to save your updates. Available fields consist of:  
• Email: adds a contact email address for this entry.  
• Group: assigns this contact to group. Touch an group type to  
complete the assignment. For more information, refer to  
“Creating New Group” on page 86.  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adding More Fields to a Number  
• Address: adds a field used to assign a physical address for this  
entry.  
While in the process of creating a new entry or editing an existing  
contact, you can add additional fields to the entry’s list of  
Done  
3. Touch  
to store the new fields to the entry and  
return to the previous screen.  
– or –  
information.  
Add More Fields  
1. Within the open Contact Screen, touch  
.
Add More  
Fields  
To add even more fields, touch  
previous step.  
and repeat the  
2. Place a checkmark adjacent to an individual field by  
touching each entry.  
– or –  
Deleting Fields From a Number  
Delete  
Fields  
Place a checkmark alongside all entries by touching All  
.
1. Within the open Contact Screen, touch  
.
Additional fields include:  
2. Touch  
to confirm deletion of an individual field. After  
each deletion, you are returned to the Contacts screen.  
• Mobile: adds an additional number field for the entry.  
• Email: adds an additional contact email address field for this entry.  
• URL: adds a Web site’s URL to the entry.  
3. Repeat the above step for each field you wish to delete.  
Save  
4. Once you have made your modifications, touch  
to  
• DTMF: adds a DTMF tone string for use with this entry.  
• Group: creates an additional group field for group assignment.  
store the new entry and its fields.  
Saving a Number During a Call  
• Message Tone: adds a field used to assign a message tone that  
will sound when messages are received from this contact.  
1. Make your call, touch  
, use the onscreen keypad to  
• NickName: adds a field that can be used to enter a nickname for  
the entry that is displayed when calls are either made to or received  
from the contact.  
enter your number.  
2. Press  
or touch  
to initiate the call.  
More  
• Company: adds a company field for this entry.  
3. Touch  
➔
Save to Address Book  
➔
New.  
• Job Title: adds a a Job Title field for this entry.  
Understanding Your Address Book  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
81  
     
Save  
•
Select Update if this was a previously created entry and your are  
3. Touch  
➔
New.  
adding the current number to the previous entry.  
•
Select Update if this was a previously created entry and your are  
adding the current number to the previous entry.  
4. Enter the desired information, see “Saving a Number from  
the Idle screen” on page 79.  
4. Enter the desired information, see “Saving a Number from  
the Idle screen” on page 79.  
Saving a Number After a Call Has Ended  
1. Press  
to bring up the recent calls screen.  
Adding Pauses to Contact Numbers  
– or –  
When you call automated systems, you are often required to  
enter a password or account number. Instead of manually  
entering the numbers each time, you can store the numbers in  
your Contacts along with special characters called pauses.  
Touch  
➔
Tools  
➔
Recent Calls.  
2. Touch a phone number from the list to reveal the Details  
page (shown below) for the phone entry.  
To add a pause to a Contact:  
1. Touch  
, and then touch the image icon or name to  
open the Contact.  
Edit  
2. Touch  
and then select the desired phone number.  
To call the  
selected number  
3. Touch the Phone Number field and then touch the screen at  
the place where the additional numbers need to be added.  
4. Press and hold  
to add a two-second pause, and use  
the keypad to enter the additional numbers.  
To save the  
number to the  
Address Book  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Note: The default Address Book entries are: *Now - *669,  
Check Bill Balance - *225#, Directory Assistance - 411,  
Pay My Bill - *729, View Data Usage - *3282#,  
View My Minutes - *646#, Voice Dial - *08, and  
Music ID - #43.  
Finding an Address Book Entry  
You can store phone numbers and their corresponding names  
onto your SIM card and phone’s onboard memory. The two  
locations are physically separate but are used as a single entity,  
called the Address Book.  
Depending on your particular SIM card, the maximum number of  
phone numbers the SIM card can store and how they are stored  
may differ.  
OK  
5. Touch  
.
Save  
6. Touch  
to store your changes.  
1. In Idle mode, touch  
➔
Address Book  
➔
Contacts.  
Using Contacts  
2. Touch the Contacts Filter field (upper-right) and select  
Dialing a Number from Address Book  
Contacts. Additional entry categories include Groups and  
Favorites.  
Once you have stored phone numbers in the Address Book, you  
can dial them easily and quickly by either using their SIM card  
location number or by using the Search field to locate the entry.  
3. Within the Contacts list (sorted alphabetically), drag the  
Power Search tab to quickly “thumb through” the  
alphabetical listing by first name.  
Understanding Your Address Book  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
83  
       
Contacts Filter  
Phone Options  
Additional  
Options  
Power Search tab  
2. Touch  
• Call  
to reveal the first set of options:  
allows you to call a currently selected entry.  
4. When found, touch  
adjacent to the entry to make the  
call.  
:
• Video Share: allows you to share either a live video recording or  
recorded video with a phone that is similarly equipped, and if both  
SIMs have the feature enabled.  
Address Book Entry Options  
While in the details page for a specific entry (seen below) you  
have two sets of options, each accessible from two of the  
onscreen buttons.  
• Send Message  
:
allows you to send a text message or a multimedia  
message to the selected entry.  
1. Touch  
and touch a phone number from the list to  
3. Press to return to the previous Entry Options page.  
reveal the Entry Options page (shown below) for the phone  
entry.  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Edit  
4. Touch  
to alter the properties of the current entry  
FDN Mode  
Save  
such as: Name, Category, Group, or location. Touch  
FDN (Fixed Dialing Number) mode, if supported by your SIM card,  
restricts your outgoing calls to a limited set of phone numbers.  
When this feature is enabled, you can make calls only to phone  
numbers stored in the FDN list on the SIM card.  
to store your changes.  
Delete  
5. Touch  
to delete the current address book entry from  
a target location such as the Phone and/or SIM card.  
Note: FDN Mode must be set to On in the Menu  
➔
Settings  
➔
Phone  
➔
More  
6. Touch  
to reveal the second set of entry options:  
Security  
➔
Fixed Dialing Mode option before you can add, change, or  
delete contacts on the FDN List.  
• Print via Bluetooth: allows you send the selected contact entry  
information to a Bluetooth compatible printer.  
Changing the FDN mode Status  
• Send Business Card via: allows you to send a message to the  
selected entry which contains the information from an Address  
Book Business Card entry which you have on file.  
1. In Idle mode, touch  
➔
Settings  
➔
Phone  
➔
Security  
.
2. Scroll down to the Fixed Dialing Mode field and touch  
This can be sent as either a message or via Bluetooth.  
On (to enable fixed dialing) or Off to disable the option.  
• Add to Favorites: allows you add the current contact entry to your  
favorite list of callers (Favorites list).  
Important!: With Fixed Dial Mode enabled, you will NOT be able to dial any  
Own Phone Number  
number other than those created Fixed Dial Numbers.  
This function is a memory aid, which you can use to edit or  
remove your own phone number. You can also edit the default  
name assigned to your phone number.  
Creating New FDN Numbers  
With the Fixed Dial mode On, follow these procedures:  
ᮣ
In Idle mode, touch  
Settings Own Number  
➔
Address Book  
➔
Address Book  
1. In Idle mode, touch  
➔
Address Book  
➔
Fixed Dial  
➔
➔
<Name>  
.
Contacts ➔ Create FDN  
.
Understanding Your Address Book  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
85  
           
2. Touch the Group Name field and use the onscreen  
keypad/keyboard to enter a new group name. For more  
information, refer to “Entering Text” on page 40.  
OK  
Note: If FDN is Off: touch Menu -> Address Book -> Address Book Settings ->  
Fixed Dial Contacts -> Create FDN. Then follow steps 2-7.  
OK  
2. Enter your PIN2 password and touch  
. This number is  
•
Touch  
to store the new group name.  
provided to you by your Service Provider.  
3. Touch the Group Picture field and choose a location for the  
3. Touch Name and use the onscreen alphanumeric keypad to  
new image:  
OK  
enter a name for this FDN contact. Touch  
.
• Reset, although not an option with a new group, deletes any  
previously assigned image.  
4. Touch Phone Number and use the onscreen numeric  
• Take Photo to use the camera to take a new picture and assign it  
keypad to enter a contact phone number for this FDN  
to this entry.  
OK  
contact. Touch  
.
• Group Picture to retrieve a previously stored image from your  
Pictures folder and assign it to this group entry.  
5. Touch the SIM card location field to then use the onscreen  
numeric keypad to enter a location value for the entry on  
4. Touch Group Ringtone to choose an audio file for  
OK  
the SIM card. Touch  
.
assignment to this new group. Choose from Tones Music,  
,
Save  
or Recorded Audio categories.  
6. Touch  
7. Press  
to store the new FDN entry.  
to return to the Main menu.  
•
Touch a music file to play a short sample and then touch Add to  
complete the assignment.  
Group Settings  
5. Touch Group Vibration to choose a vibration type for  
Creating New Group  
assignment to this new group. Choose from five vibration  
1. In Idle mode, touch  
➔
Address Book  
➔
Group  
➔
options (Vibration 1-5).  
Create Group  
.
•
Touch a vibration option to activate a short sample and then touch  
Save to complete the assignment.  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Save  
Adding an Entry to a Group  
6. Touch  
to store the new Group category.  
3. Touch a remaining Group category to then assign the entry  
to this new group.  
Save  
4. Touch  
to store the new assignment.  
1. Touch  
, then touch an Address Book entry from the  
– or –  
list to reveal the Entry Options page (page 84) for the phone  
entry.  
1. In Idle mode, touch  
➔
Address Book  
➔
Group.  
Edit  
2. Touch  
➔
Group.  
2. Touch a group entry.  
Save  
3. Touch a current Group category ➔  
.
3. Touch Remove Member and place a checkmark alongside  
those entries you wish to add to the current Group.  
– or –  
1. In Idle mode, touch  
➔
Address Book  
➔
Group.  
4. Touch Remove  
.
2. Touch a group entry.  
Editing a Caller Group  
3. Touch Add Member and place a checkmark alongside those  
To edit a Group entry, there must be at least one member as part  
of the selected group.  
entries you wish to add to the current Group.  
1. In Idle mode, touch  
➔
Address Book  
➔
Group.  
4. Touch Add  
.
2. Touch a current Group entry.  
Removing an Entry From a Group  
More  
3. Touch  
➔
Edit Group.  
1. Touch  
, then touch an Address Book entry from the  
4. Make modifications to the Group Name  
,
Group Picture,  
list to reveal the Entry Options page (page 84) for the phone  
Group Ringtone Group Vibration fields. For more  
,
entry.  
information, refer to “Creating New Group” on page 86.  
Edit  
2. Touch  
➔
Group.  
Save  
5. Touch  
to store your changes.  
Understanding Your Address Book  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
87  
       
Address Book Favorites  
Managing Address Book Entries  
Once you have stored phone numbers in the Address Book, you  
can add them to your Favorites list.  
You can copy, delete, and view the memory status for the Phone  
and SIM entries on your phone.  
Adding Favorites to your Address Book  
Copying an Entry to the SIM Card  
1. In Idle mode, touch  
2. Touch  
3. Select the Contacts you want to add to your Favorites.  
4. Touch  
➔
Address Book  
➔
Favorites  
.
Note: When storing an Address Book entry into the SIM card, note that only  
the name, phone number, group, and slot location are initially offered  
as fields (some SIM cards may allow an address as well). To save  
additional information for a particular contact, such as other phone  
numbers, or e-mail, it is important to add new fields to that Contact  
information. It is also important to note that if you move the SIM card to  
another phone that does not support additional fields on the SIM card,  
this additional information may not be available.  
.
.
Removing Favorites from your Address Book  
Address Book Favorites  
1. In Idle mode, touch  
2. Touch  
➔
➔
.
1. In Idle mode, touch  
➔
Address Book  
➔
SIM  
.
Management Copy Contacts to SIM. The phone then  
➔
displays a list of your current contacts.  
3. Select the Contacts you want to remove from your  
Favorites.  
2. Place a checkmark adjacent to those entries you wish to  
have copied to the SIM card.  
OK  
4. Touch  
.
•
Repeat this step for all individual entries you wish copied to the SIM  
or touch All to place a checkmark alongside all entries.  
Changing the Order of your Favorites  
Address Book  
1. In Idle mode, touch  
2. Touch  
➔
➔
Favorites  
.
3. Touch Copy. You are prompted to confirm that you want to  
.
copy these entries to the SIM card.  
3. Drag the entry to the desired location in your Favorites.  
4. When you are finished, press  
to return to the Main  
OK  
4. Touch  
.
menu.  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Deleting all entries from the Phone  
Copying an Entry to the Phone  
1. In Idle mode, touch  
➔
Address Book  
➔
SIM  
1. In Idle mode, touch  
Delete  
➔
Address Book  
➔
Contacts  
➔
Management Copy Contacts from SIM. The phone then  
➔
.
displays a list of your current contacts held on the SIM  
card.  
2. Touch the All field to place checkmarks alongside all the  
current Address Book entries.  
•
If the entry’s associated Group graphic has a SIM location icon on it,  
then the entry exists on the SIM card. This is the type you can  
duplicate.  
3. Touch Delete  
.
4. When you are finished, press  
to return to the Main  
•
If the entry’s associated Group image does not have a SIM location  
icon, then this entry currently exists on the phone.  
menu.  
Deleting all entries from the SIM  
2. Place a checkmark adjacent to those entries you wish to  
1. In Idle mode, touch  
➔
Address Book  
➔
SIM  
have copied from the SIM card to the Phone.  
Management Delete Contacts from SIM  
➔
.
•
Repeat this step for all individual entries you wish copied to the  
Phone or touch All to place a checkmark alongside all entries.  
Touch the All field to place checkmarks alongside all the  
current Address Book entries.  
3. Touch Copy  
.
4. When you are finished, press  
to return to the Main  
2. Touch Delete  
.
menu.  
3. When you are finished, press  
to return to the Main  
Deleting All of the Address Book Entries  
menu.  
You can delete all Phone or SIM entries from your phone’s  
memory.  
Note: Entries on the FDN Address Book must be deleted from within the FDN  
Address Book  
Understanding Your Address Book  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
89  
     
–
–
Additional No. 1: if you have added additional numbers to contacts  
saved on the SIM card, this is a counter of the number of SIM contacts  
with a second number saved on your SIM card.  
Using the Service Dialing Numbers  
You can view the list of Service Dialing Numbers (SDN) assigned  
by your service provider. These numbers may include emergency  
numbers, customer service numbers, and directory inquiries.  
Additional No. 2:if you have added additional numbers to contacts  
saved on the SIM card, this is a counter of the number of SIM contacts  
with a third number saved on your SIM card.  
1. In Idle mode, touch  
➔
Address Book ➔ Service  
• Email: tells you how many entries are in use.  
Number.  
• FDN: tells you how many entries are in use (out of a possible 40).  
2. Scroll through the available numbers.  
Note: Depending on the SIM card, the number of entries may differ.  
3. To dial the number displayed, press  
.
2. Once finished, press  
to return to the Main menu.  
Note: This menu is available only when your SIM card supports Service  
Dialing Numbers.  
YPmobile  
The Yellowpages.com application provides quick and ready  
access to businesses, map locations, and storage of your favorite  
searches (My Place). This application allows you to tap into local  
businesses, locations, and events, connecting you to your search  
in real-time.  
Checking the Address Book’s Used Space  
You can check how many names and numbers are stored in the  
Address book, in both SIM card and the phone memory. You can  
also see the capacity of both memories.  
1. In Idle mode, touch  
Settings Used Space.  
➔
Address Book  
➔
Address Book  
1. Touch  
➔
YPmobile.  
➔
2. Follow the onscreen prompts to enter the desired business  
• Phone: tells you how many Address Book entries (out of a possible  
2000) are in use.  
name, location or search by category types.  
• SIM Card: tells you how many entries are in use on your SIM card.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Section 9: My Stuff  
The topics covered in this section include audio, games, apps,  
pictures, videos, camera, alarms, calendar, recent calls, tasks,  
memos, calculator, converter, world clock, timer, and stopwatch.  
• More: provides you with the ability to Delete, Rename, Sort by,  
Send via Bluetooth, Bluetooth Visibility, and Lock/Unlock certain files  
or folders.  
Creating a New Folder  
My Stuff  
2. Select a destination for the new folder by touching either  
Phone or Memory Card  
1. Touch  
2. Select from one of the following functions: Audio  
Apps Pictures Videos Tools Other Files, or Used Space  
3. Touch the filter drop down (upper-right of My Stuff page) to  
➔
My Stuff.  
1. Touch  
➔
➔
Create Folder.  
,
Games &  
,
,
,
,
.
.
3. Use the onscreen alphanumeric keypad to create a new  
filter the entries based on their current location (All Phone,  
,
OK  
name for the folder and touch  
once your are done.  
or Memory Card).  
Managing Files and Folders  
My Stuff Functions  
This page provides you with several functions that can be  
1. Touch  
➔
My Stuff  
➔
Manage.  
activated from virtually any page within the My Stuff directories.  
Most editing features are only applicable to those files/folders  
that are not locked, and therefore editable.  
2. Select a migration option by touching either Move or Copy  
.
• Move: takes an unlocked file/folder and moves it to a new location.  
• Copy: takes the selected file/folder and duplicates it in the new  
location.  
1. Touch  
➔
My Stuff.  
2. Select from the following:  
3. Select an unlocked entry by touching it to then place a  
checkmark next to the entry.  
• Create Folder: create a new My Stuff folder on either the Phone or  
Memory Card.  
•
Touch All to place a checkmark alongside all available/unlocked  
items.  
• Manage: allows you to move or copy an existing unlocked folder or  
file.  
My Stuff  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4. Once complete, touch Move  
/
Copy to complete the process.  
Tones  
You can shop, download, and save to your Downloaded  
Ringtones folder.  
More Functionality  
1. Touch  
➔
My Stuff  
➔
More.  
1. Touch  
➔
My Stuff  
➔
Audio  
➔
Tones. A menu then  
2. Select an onscreen option:  
displays to give you the option of either shopping for tones  
or selecting from files previously stored to your phone.  
• Delete: erases selected files/folders.  
• Rename: renames the selected files/folders.  
2. Touch Shop Tones ➔ select a file to download, and follow  
the on-screen options. (These files are downloaded and  
stored in the Tones folder.)  
• Sort by: sorts the current available files and folders using either:  
Date, Type, Name, or Size.  
• Send via Bluetooth: sends a selected file via Bluetooth to another  
compatible device.  
– or –  
• Bluetooth Visibility: allows you to make specific files or folders  
visible to other Bluetooth devices.  
Touch an available entry.  
• Lock: locks available files and folders.  
3. From the playback page, touch Set as and select from the  
Audio Files  
following options:  
The Audio menu option allows you to shop tones, answer tones,  
and music using the WAP browser. You can also access  
previously stored (pre-recorded) audio files from your internal  
miroSD card.  
• Call Ringtone: allows you to assign the selected ringtone for use  
with general incoming calls when no other caller ringtone has been  
assigned.  
• Caller Ringtone: allows you to assign a ringtone to someone in  
your Contacts list (Search Contact) or Create Contact  
.
1. Touch  
➔
My Stuff  
➔
Audio.  
• Alarm Tone: allows you to assign the tone to an alarm.  
2. Touch an onscreen option (Tones Ringback Tones, Music,  
,
and Recorded Audio).  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Ringback Tones  
Recorded Audio  
You can shop and download Ringback Tones, manage your  
Ringback Tones, and access Help files. To access the Ringback  
Tones menu option, use the following steps:  
This menu shows a list of saved voice memos. When a voice  
memo is recorded and saved, it is stored in the Recorded Audio  
folder. To access this menu use the following steps:  
1. Touch  
➔
My Stuff  
➔
Audio  
➔
Ringback Tones  
.
1. Touch  
2. Touch a pre-recorded memo to begin playback.  
3. To exit, press  
➔
My Stuff  
➔
Audio  
➔
Recorded Audio.  
2. Touch one of the following options and follow the onscreen  
instructions.  
.
• Shop Ringback Tones: launches the WAP browser from which you  
can touch Shop Ringback Tones, then follow the onscreen  
instructions to purchase a file.  
Creating a new audio recording  
1. Touch  
➔
Tools  
➔
Record Audio.  
• Manage Ringback Tones: launches the WAP browser from which  
you can assign Ringback Tones to Callers and Groups, turn your  
greeting on or off, and shop for more Ringback Tones.  
2. To start recording, touch  
.
For more information, refer to “Record Audio” on page 137.  
Games and Apps  
• About Ringback Tones: launches the WAP browser from which  
you can navigate through the frequently asked questions regarding  
Ringback Tones.  
The Games & Apps menu option allows you to shop games and  
applications using the WAP browser. You can download new  
games and applications, then save them to the Games & Apps  
folder.  
Music  
This menu allows you to shop for music using the WAP browser.  
1. Touch My Stuff Audio Music Shop Music  
to launch the WAP browser.  
2. Follow the on-screen options.  
➔
➔
➔
➔
For more information, refer to “Games & Apps” on page 118.  
Picture  
The Picture menu option allows you to shop for and download  
new graphics (using the WAP browser), then save them to your  
My Stuff  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Picture folder. To access the Pictures menu option, use the  
following steps:  
Image Features  
Touch a graphic from the Picture page to display the image. From  
the image viewer page, you have access to both macro functions  
(Zoom, Edit, and Info) and menu options.  
ᮣ
Touch  
➔
My Stuff  
➔
Picture.  
From the Picture page you can access the following menu  
options (see “My Stuff Functions” on page 91.):  
•
•
Zoom: allows you to magnify the current image.  
Edit: allows you to edit the current image by applying various image  
effects. For more information, refer to “Editing Images” on page 95.  
• Create Folder: create a new My Stuff folder on either the Phone or  
Memory Card.  
• Manage: allows you to move or copy an existing unlocked folder or  
file.  
Note: Editing is only available for unlocked images or non DRM images.  
• More: provides you with the ability to Delete, Rename, Sort by,  
Send via Bluetooth, Bluetooth Visibility, and Lock/Unlock certain files  
or folders.  
•
•
Information: displays an onscreen listing of the image’s properties  
such as: name, format, size, etc.  
Send: lets you send the currently active image as part of a new  
multimedia message, to an external device via Bluetooth, or to HP’s  
Shop Graphics  
1. Touch  
➔
My Stuff  
➔
Picture  
➔
Shop Graphics. The  
®
online Snapfish service.  
WAP browser is launched.  
•
•
Set as: allows you to assign the current image as either your current  
Wallpaper, or as a display image used by a specific entry within your  
Address Book.  
2. Follow the onscreen options to purchase the new image.  
The file is downloaded and stored in the Picture folder.  
More: allows you to choose from the following image options:  
• Delete: allows you to delete the current graphic.  
3. To access a new application, touch the entry from the  
available list.  
• Rename: allows you to rename the current graphic.  
• Slide Show: allows you play a slideshow using the graphics  
currently available from within the Pictures folder. Press  
stop the slideshow.  
to  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Bluetooth Visibility: allows you to toggle your current Bluetooth  
visibility status between Visible or Hidden.  
• Insert: allows you to add Frames  
,
Picture, Clip arts, Emoticon,  
and Text to the image.  
• Print via: allows you to make a selected graphic printable by either  
• Memo on screen: allows you to select a color, then handwrite a  
message onto the current image. Touch Done to store the new  
changes.  
USB or Bluetooth printer.  
• Lock/Unlock: allows you to secure a selected graphic by protecting  
it from accidental alterations.  
Video  
• Properties: allows you to view the properties of a photo.  
This menu allows you shop for videos and to set up folders to  
save your videos using the WAP browser.  
Editing Images  
1. Touch  
➔
My Stuff  
➔
Video  
➔
Shop Videos. The WAP  
1. Touch  
➔
My Stuff  
➔
Picture  
➔
<image>.  
browser is launched.  
2. Touch Edit  
(
) ➔ Files  
➔
Open or Save as (to save a  
2. Follow the onscreen options to purchase the new video.  
renamed copy of this image).  
– or –  
The file is downloaded and stored in the Video folder.  
Touch Edit  
(
) ➔ Edit and select from any of the  
Tools  
following:  
The Tools folder provides access to and allows you to use the  
Camera, Record Audio files, set Alarms, use the Calendar  
features, view Recent Calls, create Tasks, create Memos, use the  
Calculator, use the Converter (for currency, length, weight,  
volume, area, and temperature), view World Clock, set the Timer,  
and use the Stopwatch.  
• Effects: allows you to choose from among several effects such as:  
Filter Style Warp, or Partial Blur  
,
,
.
• Adjust: allows you to adjust Auto Level  
and Color  
,
Brightness, Contrast,  
.
• Transform: allows you to Resize Rotate, and Flip the image.  
,
For more information, refer to “Tools are feature options that  
allow you to use your handset for a variety of non-phone related  
activities. To access any of the tools, perform the following:” on  
page 137.  
• Crop: allows you to crop the image. Touch one corner of the image  
and, in a single motion, drag to another location to create the crop  
area, then touch Crop  
.
My Stuff  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Camera  
Alarms  
Taking Photos  
1. Press the Camera key to activate the camera mode.  
This feature allows you to:  
•
•
set the alarm to ring at a specific time.  
set the phone to switch on automatically and ring the alarm even if the  
phone is switched off.  
– or –  
In Idle mode, touch  
➔
Tools  
➔
Camera.  
ᮣ
Access the Alarms menu by selecting My Stuff  
Alarms  
➔
Tools  
➔
.
Note: When taking a photo in direct sunlight or in bright conditions, shadows may  
appear on the photo.  
For more information, refer to “Alarms” on page 138.  
2. If desired, before taking the photo, press the onscreen  
Calendar  
Settings button to access camera options.  
The calendar feature allows you to view the Month, Week, and  
Day layout views. Events such as an appointment, anniversary, or  
private entries are merged into a single scheduled event. It also  
shows any Missed Alarm Events that have occurred.  
3. Press the Camera key to take the photo.  
Note: Your camera produces photos in JPEG format.  
Note: Birthdays which take place on the current day are displayed within the  
For more information, refer to “Using the Camera” on page 99.  
onscreen Birthday widget (page 21).  
Record Audio  
ᮣ
Access the Calendar menu by selecting My Stuff  
Calendar  
For more information, refer to “Calendar” on page 139.  
➔
Tools  
➔
Record Audio allows you to record voice memos. It also allows  
you to send your audio clip to other people as an attachment of  
an MMS message. Recording time is limited to free memory  
space available.  
.
For more information, refer to “Record Audio” on page 137.  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Recent Calls  
Calculator  
The phone stores the numbers of the calls you’ve dialed,  
received, or missed in the Recent Calls menu. If the number or  
caller is listed in your Address Book, the associated name is  
displayed.  
This option allows you to use your phone as a calculator. The  
calculator provides the basic arithmetic functions; addition,  
subtraction, multiplication, and division.  
ᮣ
Access the Calculator menu by selecting My Stuff  
Calculator  
➔
Tools ➔  
ᮣ
Access the Recent Calls menu by selecting My Stuff  
Recent Calls  
➔
Tools  
➔
.
.
For more information, refer to “Calculator” on page 141.  
For more information, refer to “Recent Calls” on page 140.  
Converter  
The Converter menu provides the following conversion  
categories:  
Tasks  
This menu option allows you to create a “to do” entry of tasks  
which are created in a similar fashion to previously described  
Calendar entries.  
•
•
Currency  
Length  
ᮣ
Access the Tasks menu by selecting My Stuff  
➔
Tools  
➔
•
Weight  
Tasks.  
•
Volume  
Area  
•
For more information, refer to “Tasks” on page 141.  
•
Temperature  
Memo  
ᮣ
Access the Converter menu by selecting My Stuff  
➔
Tools ➔  
This option allows you to create memos and add them to your  
events.  
Converter  
.
For more information, refer to “Converter” on page 141.  
ᮣ
Access the Memo menu by selecting My Stuff  
Memo  
For more information, refer to “Memo” on page 141.  
➔
Tools  
➔
.
My Stuff  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
For more information, refer to “Stopwatch” on page 143.  
World Clock  
Other Files  
The World Clock allows you to view the time of day or night in  
100 different cities around the world, within all 24 time zones.  
World Clock is very useful when traveling because you can view  
not only your home time, but also several other cities you have  
added to the World Clock list. You can also enable or disable the  
visiting time zone DST (Daylight Savings Time), if needed.  
This feature provide additional storage of other miscellaneous file  
types that may not fit into any of the previous categories.  
ᮣ
Access the Other Files menu by selecting My Stuff  
Files  
Used Space  
➔
Other  
.
ᮣ
Access the World Clock menu by selecting My Stuff  
World Clock  
➔
Tools  
➔
.
The Used Space menu option allows you to view the usage and  
available memory for Audio, Games & Apps, Pictures, Videos, and  
Other Files. To access the Used Space option, use the following  
steps:  
For more information, refer to “World Clock” on page 142.  
Timer  
The Timer allows you to set an amount on time and then activate  
the built-in counter to begin a countdown (Hour/Minute/Second)  
to that preset time frame.  
1. Touch  
2. Choose from Audio  
Files  
3. Press  
➔
My Stuff  
➔
Used Space  
.
,
Games & Apps  
,
Picture Video, or Other  
,
.
ᮣ
Access the Timer menu by selecting My Stuff  
➔
Tools  
➔
Timer.  
to return to the Used Space menu.  
For more information, refer to “Timer” on page 143.  
Stopwatch  
This feature allows you can to measure intervals of time for fifty  
separate times. To enable the Stopwatch, do the following:  
ᮣ
Access the Stopwatch menu by selecting My Stuff  
Stopwatch  
➔
Tools  
➔
.
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
Section 10: Camera  
This section explains how to use the camera on your phone. You  
can take photographs and shoot video by using the built-in  
camera functionality. Your 3.0 megapixel camera produces  
photos in JPEG format.  
2. Using the phone’s main display screen as a viewfinder,  
adjust the image by aiming the camera at the subject.  
3. Press the Camera key until the shutter sounds. (The  
picture will automatically be stored within your designated  
storage location. If no microSD is installed, all pictures will  
be stored on the Phone.) For more information, refer to  
“Camera and Camcorder Options” on page 100.  
Important!: Do not take photos of people without their permission.  
Do not take photos in places where cameras are not allowed.  
Do not take photos in places where you may interfere with  
another person’s privacy.  
Using the Camera  
Taking Photos  
Display Image  
Current mode  
Pictures Remaining  
Taking pictures with your device’s built-in camera is as simple as  
choosing a subject, pointing the camera, then pressing the  
camera key.  
Note: When taking a photo in direct sunlight or in bright conditions, shadows  
may appear on the photo.  
1. Press the Camera key to activate the camera mode.  
– or –  
In Idle mode, touch  
➔
Tools  
➔
Camera.  
Current Configurations  
Settings  
Camera  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Shooting mode: allows you to set the shooting mode.  
Options are:  
Note: The number of JPEG pictures remaining on the selected media appears  
in the upper-right of the screen. This is an approximate number of total  
pictures which can be taken at the current image size.  
•
•
•
Single: takes a single photo and view it before  
returning to the shooting mode.  
4. If desired, before taking the photo, you can touch onscreen  
Continuous: takes a succession of consecutive photos  
by pressing and holding the Camera key.  
icons to access various camera options.  
5. Press  
to return to the picture viewer.  
Panorama: takes a landscape photo by taking an  
initial photo and then adding additional images to  
itself. The guide box lets you view the area where the  
second part of the panoramic picture should fall  
within.  
Camera and Camcorder Options  
Options are represented by icons across both sides of the screen.  
Camera/Camcorder/VideoShareMode:allowsyoutotakea  
photo in various modes. Once you change the mode, the  
corresponding indicator appears at the top left of the  
display. Choose from Camera, Camcorder, or Video Share.  
•
Smile Shot: the camera focuses on the face of your  
subject. Once the camera detects the person’s smile,  
it will take the picture.  
•
•
Mosaic: takes up to nine photos and then groups them  
together into a single final photo.  
Recording Mode: allows you to set the recording mode to  
either: Normal (limited only by available space on  
destination location), Limit for MMS (limited by MMS size  
restrictions), Video Share (only available in Camcorder  
mode).  
Frame: allows you to choose a custom frame border  
for your image. Choose from one of the 20 available  
frames. Touch OK to assign the frame.  
Camera Resolution: allows you to set the image size to  
either:3M(2048x1536),2M(1600x1200),1M(1280x960),  
0.3M(640x480), w3M (2048X1232) or 400x240.  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Camcorder Resolution: allows you to set the video size to  
Settings tab:  
either: 320x240 or 176x144.  
•
•
Guidelines: allows you to turn the guidelines On or Off.  
Settings: allows you to customize your camera settings.  
Choose the following options and touch OK  
Review: allows you to activate the instant review  
feature where images are displayed immediately after  
review (On or Off).  
:
Camera tab  
:
•
•
GPS: allows you to record coordinates information into  
image files.  
•
•
•
•
Effects: allows you to change the color tone or apply  
special effects to the photo. Options include: None,  
Black and White, Sepia, Negative, or Water Color.  
Shutter Sound: allows you to select a tone to play  
when the camera’s shutter opens and closes. Sound  
selections are Shutter 1, Shutter 2, Shutter 3, or Off.  
Exposure Meter: allows you to set how the camera  
measures or meters the light source: Matrix,  
Center-Weighted, or Spot.  
•
•
Audio Recording: allows you to record audio while  
recording video. Selecting Off, temporarily mutes the  
microphone and records only video.  
Scene: allows you to set the camera options to  
capture scenes such as None, Portrait, Landscape,  
Night, Sports, Sunset, or Text.  
Storage: allows you to configure the default storage  
location for images/videos as either Phone or Memory  
Card (if inserted).  
Image Quality: allows you to set the image quality to:  
Superfine, Fine, Normal, or Economy.  
White Balance: allows you to set this option from the  
following choices: Auto, Daylight, Incandescent,  
Fluorescent, or Cloudy.  
Camcorder tab  
:
•
Effects: allows you to change the color tone or apply  
special effects to the video. Options include: None,  
Black and White, Sepia, Negative, or Water Color.  
Timer: allows you to set a time delay before the camera  
takes the photo or the camcorder begins recording video.  
Optionsinclude: Off, 2seconds, 5 seconds, or 10seconds.  
•
Video Quality: allows you to set the video quality to:  
Fine, Normal, or Economy.  
Camera  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
ᮣ
Touch  
➔
and then touch one of the available  
): to play the available images (from the  
Brightness: allows you to adjust the brightness level by  
moving the slider across the page.  
options:  
•
Play Slideshow  
(
AccessPictures/VideoFolderOptions:allowsyoutoaccess  
the options page for a selected image/video. Options  
include: Play slideshow, Edit, Information, Send, Set as,  
Delete, and Return to previous page.  
Pictures folder) within a slideshow. Touch the Up/Down arrows to set  
the duration of each onscreen image.  
•
Edit  
(
): allows you to edit the current image using any of the  
following:  
Pictures/Videos Folder Options  
–
–
Effects: allows you to choose from among several effects.  
Adjust: allows you to adjust Auto Level Brightness Contrast, and  
Color  
Transform: allows you to Resize  
,
,
After you have taken a photo or shot a video, you can access  
various options from the Pictures/Video Folder page.  
.
–
–
,
Rotate, and Flip the image.  
Image/Video  
Crop: allows you to crop the image. Touch one corner of the image and,  
Send  
Play Slideshow  
in a single motion, drag to another location to create the crop area,  
then touch Crop  
.
–
–
Insert: allows you to add Frames Picture, Clip arts, Emoticon, and  
Text to the image.  
Memo on screen: allows you to select a color, then handwrite a  
message onto the current image. Touch Done to store the new  
changes.  
,
Note: Edit and Set as are not a features available when the camcorder mode  
is active.  
•
Information  
(
): displays file information such as name, format,  
Return to previous page  
Edit  
size, resolution, etc.  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
•
•
Send  
(
): lets you send the currently active image as part of a  
•
•
•
Send: lets you send the currently active image as part of a new  
new multimedia message, to an external device via Bluetooth, or via  
Online Locker.  
multimedia message, to an external device via Bluetooth, or to HP’s  
®
online Snapfish service.  
Set as  
(
): allows you to assign the current image as either your  
Set as: allows you to assign the current image as either your current  
Wallpaper, or as a display image used by a specific entry within your  
Address Book.  
current Wallpaper, or as a display image used by a specific entry  
within your Address Book.  
•
•
Delete  
Return  
(
): erases the currently selected image/video.  
More: allows you to choose from the following image options:  
–
–
–
Delete: allows you to delete the current graphic.  
Rename: allows you to rename the current graphic.  
Slide Show: allows you play a slideshow using the pictures currently  
available from within the Pictures page. Touch the screen to stop the  
slideshow.  
(
): takes you back to the previously active camera or  
camcorder page where you can take another photo or shoot a new  
video.  
Accessing the Pictures Folder  
My Stuff Picture.  
1. Touch  
➔
➔
–
–
–
–
Bluetooth Visibility: allows you to toggle your current Bluetooth  
visibility status between Visible or Hidden.  
Print via: allows you to make a selected graphic printable by either USB  
or Bluetooth printer.  
Lock/Unlock: allows you to secure a selected graphic by making it  
protected from accidental alterations.  
Properties: allows you to view the properties of a photo.  
2. Touch a photo to open it in the viewer.  
Selecting and Using the Pictures Folder  
Touch a picture from the Pictures page to display the image.  
From the image viewer page, you have access to both macro  
functions (Zoom, Edit, and Info) and menu options.  
•
•
Zoom: allows you to magnify the current image.  
Edit: allows you to edit the current image by applying various image  
effects.  
Editing a Photo  
1. Touch  
➔
My Stuff  
➔
Picture  
➔
<image>.  
2. Use the following options onscreen buttons and icons for  
•
Information: displays an onscreen listing of the image’s properties  
such as: name, format, size, etc.  
editing and photo management.  
Camera  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Touch Edit  
(
) ➔ Edit and select from any of the  
Touch Set as  
➔
Caller Image  
➔
Create Contact, and follow  
following:  
the create a new Address Book entry with the image  
already assigned. For more information, refer to  
“Understanding Your Address Book” on page 79.  
• Effects: allows you to choose from among several effects such as:  
Filter Style Warp, or Partial Blur  
,
,
.
• Adjust: allows you to adjust Auto Level  
,
Brightness, Contrast,  
Assigning an Image as a Wallpaper  
and Color  
.
1. Touch  
➔
My Stuff  
➔
Picture  
➔
<image>.  
• Transform: allows you to Resize Rotate, and Flip the image.  
,
• Crop: allows you to crop the image. Touch one corner of the image  
2. Touch Set as  
➔
Wallpaper  
.
and, in a single motion, drag to another location to create the crop  
3. Touch the screen to reveal the adjustment tools:  
area, then touch Crop  
• Insert: allows you to add Frames  
and Text to the image.  
.
,
Picture  
,
Clip arts  
,
Emoticon  
,
•
Zoom slider: touch the magnifying icons at either the top or bottom  
of the slider to adjust the magnification of the current image.  
• Memo on screen: allows you to select a color, then handwrite a  
message onto the current image. Touch Done to store the new  
changes.  
•
Rotate: orients the current image in either a landscape or portrait  
orientation. The bottom left of the page indicates how much of the  
image will be displayed as the wallpaper.  
Set  
Assigning an Image to an Address Book Entry  
4. Touch  
to store the new settings and assign the  
wallpaper image.  
1. Touch  
➔
My Stuff  
➔
Picture  
➔
<image>.  
Using the Camcorder  
In addition to taking photos, the camera also doubles as a  
camcorder allowing you to also record, view, and send videos.  
2. Touch Set as  
➔
Caller Image  
➔
Search Contact, touch an  
Save  
onscreen entry and touch  
– or –  
.
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Shooting Video  
•
•
Video Share allows you to make a Video Share call by displaying a  
screen where you can input the number of a recipient that also has  
Video Share. (This option will only display if you have the Video  
Share service.) If the recipient accepts the Video Share call, you  
continue using the camcorder as usual.  
Tip: When shooting video in direct sunlight or in bright conditions, it is  
recommended that you provide your subject with sufficient light by  
having the light source behind you.  
Touch  
to end the Video Share session. You will get a  
1. In Idle mode, touch  
➔
Tools  
➔
Camera.  
message “Video Sharing has been Stopped. Save the Recorded  
Video?” You can select either Yes or No. You can then continue the  
call or terminate it.  
– or –  
Press the Camera key to activate the camera mode.  
6. Once the file has been saved, touch  
to play back your  
2. Touch then touch Camcorder ( ).  
video for review.  
3. Using the phone’s main display screen as a viewfinder,  
7. Press  
to return to the viewer.  
adjust the image by aiming the camera at the subject.  
Camcorder Options  
4. Press the Camera key again to begin shooting video.  
Camcorder options are represented by icons across both sides of  
the screen.  
5. Touch  
your Videos folder.  
– or –  
Before shooting, touch  
to stop the recording and save the video file to  
For more information, refer to “Camera and Camcorder Options”  
on page 100.  
Camcorder Options after a Video is Taken  
and select Video Share  
.
After you have shot a video, you can use various options that  
appear as icons on the screen. Touch an icon to activate the  
function.  
ᮣ
Touch  
➔
and then touch one of the available  
options:  
Camera  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
•
Play Slideshow  
(
): to play the available images (from the  
•
•
Manage: allows you to move or copy an existing unlocked folder or  
file.  
Pictures folder) within a slideshow. Touch the Up/Down arrows to set  
the duration of each onscreen image.  
–
Move: allows you to choose the Selected or Multiple videos to move.  
–
Copy: allows you to copy a selected or multiple videos.  
Note: Edit and Set as are not a features available when the camcorder mode  
More: provides you with the ability to Delete, Rename, Sort by, Send  
via Bluetooth, Bluetooth Visibility, and Lock/Unlock certain files or  
folders.  
is active.  
•
•
Information  
size, resolution, etc.  
Send ): lets you send the currently active image as part of a  
new multimedia message or to an external device via Bluetooth.  
(
): displays file information such as name, format,  
–
–
–
–
Delete: allows you to delete the Selected video or Multiple videos.  
Rename: allows you to rename the video file.  
Sort by: allows you to sort video clips by Name, Date, Size or Type.  
Send via Bluetooth: allows you to send the video to a Bluetooth  
device.  
(
•
•
Delete  
Return  
(
): erases the currently selected image/video.  
(
): takes you back to the previously active camera or  
–
–
Bluetooth Visibility: allows you to make the Selected or Multiple  
videos visible to Bluetooth devices.  
Lock/Unlock: allows you to lock/unlock the video file to prevent  
deletion. Lock prevents the video clip from being deleted; Unlock allows  
the video clip to be deleted.  
camcorder page where you can take another photo or shoot a new  
video.  
Accessing the Video Folder  
My Stuff  
2. Touch a video to open it in the viewer and initiate playback.  
3. To play the video, touch  
1. Touch  
➔
➔
Video.  
Once you have selected the video to play, your options are:  
Options ): to access the following:  
•
(
.
–
–
–
Send via: allows you to send the video clip via a multimedia message  
or a Bluetooth device.  
Display Mode: allows you to select Full Screen, Full Screen in Ratio, or  
Original Size to view your video.  
Options available from the main Videos page, and before you  
select it to play:  
•
Create Folder: create a new My Stuff folder on either the Phone or  
Memory Card.  
Properties: allows you to view the properties for this video file.  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
•
•
•
•
Full-Screen View: allows you to change the display mode to the full-  
screen option while the video is playing.  
Pause/Resume: allows you to pause the video being played, and then  
resume playing.  
Previous/Next: allows you to jump to either the previously played  
video or the next file in the Videos folder.  
Exit: takes you back to the Videos page.  
Camera  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 11: Messaging  
This section describes how to send or receive different types of  
messages. It also includes the features and functionality  
associated with messaging.  
Important!: When creating a message, adding an image, a sound file, or a  
video clip to a text message changes the message from a text  
message to a multimedia message.  
Save  
ᮣ
Touch  
to store each new settings.  
Messaging icons are displayed at the top of the screen and  
indicate when messages are received and their type. For more  
information, refer to “Icons” on page 15.  
Types of Messages  
Your phone provides the following message types:  
Creating and Sending Messages  
•
•
•
Text Messages  
Multimedia (Picture and Video) Messages  
IM Messages  
1. Touch  
➔
Messaging  
➔
Create Message.  
– or –  
The Short Message Service (SMS) lets you send and receive text  
messages to and from other mobile phones or email addresses.  
To use this feature, you must subscribe to your service provider’s  
message service.  
Touch Message from the bottom of the Main menu.  
2. Select a recipient by selecting an entry method by touch  
Tap to Add Recipient and then selecting an associated  
option:  
The Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS) lets you send and  
receive multimedia messages (such as picture messages and  
video messages) to and from other mobile phones or email  
addresses. To use this feature, you must subscribe to your  
service provider’s multimedia message service.  
• FDN contacts: (if FDN mode has been turned on) to select a  
recipient from your FDN Contacts list.  
• Enter Manually: to manually enter a destination using a valid  
cellular phone number.  
• Contacts: to select a recipient from your Contacts list (valid entries  
must have a wireless phone number).  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
• Recent Contacts: to select a recipient from a list of recently sent  
Additional Message Options  
messages.  
Insert  
1. Touch  
to reveal additional insert options.  
• Group: to select a recipient from the Group list.  
• Picture: allows you to choose an existing image from the Pictures  
list, then add it to your message by touching Add  
.
Note: If the number of recipients are less than 10, all members in the group  
will be added. You will need to delete any unnecessary members in the  
list by selecting the trash can icon and deleting unwanted entries.  
• Video: allows you to choose an existing video from the Videos list,  
touch , then select Add  
.
• Audio: allows you to choose an existing audio file from the Audio  
list, then add it to your message by touching Add  
.
Note: Enter additional recipients by separating each entry with a semicolon  
(;) then using the previous procedure.  
• Take Picture: allows you to temporarily exit the message, take a  
photo with phone’s camera, and then add it to your message by  
3. Touch the empty onscreen text field and use the onscreen  
keyboard to enter a message. Rotate the phone on its side  
to reveal the keyboard. For more information, refer to  
“Entering Text” on page 40.  
touching OK  
.
• Record Video: allows you to temporarily exit the message, record a  
video clip using the phone’s camera, and then add it to your  
message by touching OK  
.
• Record Audio: allows you to temporarily exit the message, record  
an audio clip using the phone’s microphone, and then add it to your  
OK  
4. Touch  
to save your text and return to the message  
message by touching Add  
.
screen.  
• Text Template: allows you to insert one of the preset message  
5. Add more recipients by touching the recipient field.  
templates to the text (for example, “Where is the meeting?”).  
Send  
6. Review you message and touch  
.
• Favorites URL: allows you to temporarily exit the message, access  
your Favorites list then select those URLs you would like to add to  
the current message by touching Add  
• Contact Info: allows you to choose an existing Address Book entry,  
then add it to your message by touching Insert  
.
.
Messaging  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
More  
2. Touch  
to reveal additional options.  
• Save to Drafts: saves the current message to the Drafts folder.  
• Delivery Options: allows you to configure the options associated  
with sending the message.  
• Preview: allows you to preview your current message before  
delivery.  
3. When you have finished composing your message, touch  
• Slide Options: allows you to add more images to the current  
message but then have those configured to display as a slideshow  
on the recipients phone. Options include: Add Slide, Delete Slide, or  
Edit Style).  
Send to and confirm the recipient(s). For more  
information, refer to “Creating and Sending Messages” on  
page 108.  
• Attach Files: allows you to add either a file, card, or other  
information such as a calendar entry, task, or note.  
Send  
4. Touch  
to deliver the message to the selected  
–
–
–
–
–
–
File: allows you to insert an audio, graphic, or video clip to your  
message as an attached file.  
recipients.  
Viewing New Received Messages  
Business Card: allows you to insert the contact information for an  
entry from Address Book directly to your message as an attached file.  
1. In Idle mode, new messages are indicated by icons and a  
New Messages pop-up. For more information, refer to  
“Understanding the Event Widget” on page 26.  
Event: allows you to insert an Event entry from your calendar directly to  
your message as an attached file.  
Tasks: allows you to insert an entry from your calendar tagged as a  
Task directly to your message as an attached file.  
2. Touch the View button from the New Messages pop-up.  
Memo: allows you to insert a presaved Memo (text) directly to your  
message as an attached file.  
Note: If you accidentally exit from this notification screen, you will need to go  
to Menu  
➔
Messaging  
➔
Inbox, or you will need to dial your voicemail  
Favorites: allows you to add a web address from your Favorites list of  
Internet sites as an attachment to the message.  
to access your messages.  
• Add Subject/Remove Subject: allows you to either add or delete a  
subject field to the new message.  
3. Touch a message you wish to view. The selected message  
appears in the display.  
4. To play a multimedia message, touch  
.
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
•
•
To pause playback of the multimedia message, touch  
To stop playback of the multimedia message, touch Stop  
.
ᮣ
With the list of current message displayed onscreen, use any  
of the following menu options:  
.
5. To scroll through the message (if additional text pages  
have been added), touch the screen and in a single motion,  
scroll up or down the onscreen page.  
• List by: sort the current list based on one of the following criteria:  
–
Sender, Read/Unread, Type, Subject, Size, or Lock/Unlock status.  
• Delete: deletes either a single or multiple set of messages. Touch  
an entry from the list to place a checkmark alongside the entry and  
mark it for deletion. Touch Delete to complete the process.  
6. When you have finished, press  
.
ᮣ
With a message open for reading, use any of the following  
menu options:  
Note: Messages can also be accessed by navigating to your Inbox (Menu  
Messaging Inbox).  
➔
➔
• Reply (to): allows you to compose and send a reply to the  
message. This option reads Reply (when replying to an SMS [Text]  
message), and Reply to (when replying to an MMS [Multimedia]  
message).  
Using Message Options  
Message options at the Inbox level differ according to the  
message type, what you have done with the message, and  
whether you are viewing the message. Some of the main  
message category types include:  
• Delete: deletes the current message.  
• More: provides these additional message functions:  
•
•
•
Inbox: stores any incoming message (text or multimedia).  
Sent: stores a copy of the messages you sent.  
Outbox: contains messages until they are sent and then the message  
no longer displays in this box but instead displays in the Sent box.  
Drafts: stores unsent messages that you want to edit or send later.  
–
–
Forward: allows you to forward the message.  
Save to Address Book: allows you to save the recipient or sender’s  
information from the message to your Address Book as either a New or  
Updated entry. For more information, refer to “Understanding Your  
Address Book” on page 79.  
•
–
–
Move to Phone/Move to SIM card: If a message is stored in the SIM  
card, it is saved to the phone’s memory. If a message is stored in the  
phone’s memory, it is then saved to the SIM card.  
Save as Template: allows you to save text as a template.  
Messaging  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
–
–
Print via Bluetooth: allows you to print the contents of the message  
on a Bluetooth compatible printer.  
Using Instant Messaging (IM)  
The Instant Messaging allows you to send and receive instant  
messages using AIM, Windows Live, and Yahoo! communities.  
Save Attachment: allows you save any selected attachments. If the  
file is currently available, you are prompted to rename the filename.  
®
–
–
Properties: displays the properties of any attached files.  
Lock/Unlock: allows you to secure a selected message by  
protecting it from accidental alterations.  
Note: Before using this feature, you need to subscribe to a messaging  
service. For further details, contact your service provider.  
Signing into Your IM Account  
Signing into Your Mobile Email  
Although each account type differs, the initial sign in procedure is  
common to all supported types. Before beginning the sign in  
procedure, you must complete the previous procedures for  
selecting your default IM Community to which you are  
subscribed.  
Take your email with you! With Mobile Email you can check your  
®
®
®
Yahoo! Mail, AOL , AIM, Windows Live Hotmail, AT&T Yahoo!  
BellSouth, and other providers quickly and easily.  
,
1. Touch  
➔
Messaging  
➔
Mobile Email.  
2. Touch an Email carrier of your choice.  
1. Touch  
➔
Messaging  
➔
IM.  
3. Touch I Agree to accept the conditions of service.  
2. Touch an IM client of your choice (AIM, Windows Live, or  
4. Touch both the ID and password fields, then use your  
onscreen keyboard/keypad to enter the account  
information (for example, “silverfox2”), and touch Sign In  
You will be connected to your account's Inbox and  
contacts, where you can send and receive emails.  
Yahoo!).  
3. Touch New Account and then touch the available fields to  
enter your information such as Screen Name, Email  
Address, or Yahoo! ID, and Password. Select any additional  
fields.  
.
5. Follow any remaining onscreen instructions to complete  
4. Touch Sign In to continue.  
the process.  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
After selecting an Instant Messaging service and signing in, you  
can choose from the following options:  
3. Touch Delete and touch an entry to mark it for selection  
with a checkmark.  
• Refresh List: updates and displays the IM contact information.  
4. Touch either an individual message or Select All to place a  
• Add Contact: allows you to add an IM contact to the list.  
checkmark alongside all entries in the list.  
• More  
:
5. Touch Delete  
.
–
–
–
Settings: allows you to change your Community settings.  
Send Msg to: allows you to send a message to a selected contact.  
Delete All Messages  
Messaging  
Saved Conversations: shows permanent records of your Instant  
1. Touch  
➔
➔
Delete by Folder  
.
Messaging conversations.  
2. Touch either a single category (Inbox, Sent, Outbox, or  
Drafts) or touch All to place a checkmark alongside all  
entries.  
–
–
Minimize: minimizes the IM window.  
Sign Out: allows you to log off or disconnect from this IM session.  
Deleting Messages  
When your phone’s memory is full, an error message displays  
notifying you that you cannot receive any new messages. Use the  
Delete option erase obsolete messages, freeing memory for new  
messages. You can delete the messages in each message  
folder(s) either individually or all at one time. Another option is to  
delete messages from all categories at once.  
Delete  
3. Touch  
.
4. At the “Locked Messages” pop-up, touch Yes or Cancel to  
discontinue the process.  
Messaging Settings  
To configure the settings for text messages, multimedia  
messages, Voice mails, and Push messages.  
Deleting Messages within a Folder  
1. Touch  
2. Select a message folder (Inbox  
list of messages in the folder appears in the display.  
➔
Messaging.  
ᮣ
Touch  
➔
Settings  
➔
Applications Settings  
➔
Messaging  
.
,
Sent, Outbox, or Drafts). A  
Messaging  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring Auto Delete Inbox Settings  
Configuring the Text Message Center  
1. From Messaging Settings page, touch Text Message  
➔
Text  
When you select the Auto Delete Inbox option, inbox messages  
will be deleted automatically without a warning message.  
Message Center. These settings allow you to set the default  
method of text message transmission used by the Text  
Message Center.  
1. From Messaging Settings page, touch Auto Delete Inbox  
2. Touch one of the available setting fields:.  
• Off: Messages will not be deleted automatically.  
.
2. Touch one of the available setting fields and make the  
• 1 Week Old: Read messages more than one week old will be  
necessary updates.  
deleted automatically.  
• SMS Settings: allows you to configure the Text message delivery  
parameters when sending Text messages.  
• 2 Weeks Old: Read messages more than two weeks old will be  
deleted automatically.  
• Email Settings: allows you to configure the Email parameters when  
sending this type of message.  
• The Oldest when Full: The oldest message will be deleted  
automatically when the Inbox is full.  
• Empty: allows you to configure a new Text Message Center profile  
for use when sending this type of message.  
Save  
3. Touch  
to store the selected option.  
Configuring Text Message Settings  
1. From Messaging Settings page, touch Text Message  
Note: It is recommended that you do not alter these fields without assistance  
from a customer service representative.  
➔
Delivery Options  
2. Touch Keep a Copy and touch  
copy of all outgoing text messages.  
.
Save  
3. Touch  
to store your settings.  
Save  
to store a local  
Configuring Multimedia Message Settings  
1. From Messaging Settings page, touch Multimedia  
Message  
.
2. Touch an available field and make the necessary updates.  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
–
Send Read Report: when this option is enabled, your phone sends a  
notification back to the recipient indicating that your message has been  
received.  
• Delivery Options: to configure the parameters associated with the  
delivery of the multimedia message such as:  
–
–
Priority: you can select the priority level of your messages.  
–
–
Reject Anonymous: allows you to automatically reject messages with  
a category of anonymous.  
Expiration: select the length of time you wish the message you sent to  
remain on the Multimedia message server.  
Reject Advertisement: allows you to automatically reject messages  
with a category of advertisement.  
–
–
–
–
–
–
Delivery Time: you can set a time delay before the phone sends your  
messages.  
• MMS Profiles: to configure you Network parameters (For more  
information, refer to “Changing the WAP Profiles” on  
page 148.)  
Message Size: you can set the maximum allowed size (30/100/300/  
600 KB) for a multimedia message.  
Get Delivery Report: when this option is enabled, the network informs  
you whether or not your message has been delivered.  
• Auto Resize Image: to configure the size limits of the images  
added to new picture messages. Images larger then your setting,  
will be resized to meet this value. Options include: No Resize, 100  
KB, 300 KB, or 600 KB.  
Get Read Report: when this option is enabled, your phone requests a  
reply along with your message to the recipient.  
Keep a Copy: you specify whether you want to keep a copy of the sent  
messages on your phone.  
• Creation Mode: provide you with editing and formatting tools.  
Choose from: Free, Warning, or Restricted.  
Add My Business Card: you send your content information along with  
• Default Style: assigns the “look and feel” for the multimedia  
message screen with parameters such as: Background Color, Font  
Color (for text), Font Style, and Slide Duration (during playback).  
your sent messages.  
• Receiving Options: to configure the parameters associated  
received multimedia messages such as:  
Save  
3. Touch  
to store each new settings.  
–
–
Download Type: allows you to set the message receipt options.  
Choose from Auto Download, Manual, or Reject.  
Send Delivery Report: when this option is enabled, the phone allows  
the network report to the sender whether or not the message has been  
received.  
Messaging  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Voice Mail Settings  
1. From Messaging Settings page, touch Broadcast Message.  
Save  
There may be times when the voice mail access number might  
need to be changed. If this is necessary, please obtain the  
information from the customer service center.  
2. Touch  
to store this new information.  
Configuring Push Message Settings  
A Push Message is a method for your service provider to deliver  
Note: It is recommended that you do not alter these fields without assistance  
content (e.g. images, ringtones, software upgrades, information,  
etc.) to mobile phones that are WAP enabled. You cannot initiate  
or reply to WAP Push Messages. This message may direct you to  
go to a URL that is included in the message for further  
from a customer service representative.  
1. From Messaging Settings page, touch Voice Mail  
.
2. Touch the Voicemail field and use your onscreen  
information and/or updates, or it may be information only.  
Examples may be firmware updates or emergency notifications.  
keypad/keyboard to enter the new Name and Center  
Address (voicemail phone number).  
1. From Messaging Settings page, touch Push Message  
.
• Name: allows you to create a new descriptive name for this access  
2. From the Receiving Options field touch On (activate) or Off  
number.  
(deactivate) to toggle the state of this feature.  
• Center Address: allows you edit the existing number and create a  
new number for use when accessing the remote voicemail.  
Templates  
Save  
Besides entering text in your message by using the keypad keys,  
you can speed message composition by including copies of  
stored text into your message.  
3. Touch  
to store this new information.  
Configuring Broadcast Message Settings (SIM Card  
Dependent)  
Text Templates  
This network service allows you to receive text messages on  
various topics, such as the weather or traffic.  
1. Touch  
➔
Messaging  
➔
Templates  
➔
Text Templates.  
2. Touch Create  
.
Note: Please contact AT&T customer service for further details.  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3. Touch the empty onscreen text field and use the onscreen  
keyboard to enter a message. You can rotate the phone to  
use the qwerty keyboard. For more information, refer to  
“Entering Text” on page 40.  
Used Space  
You can check the amount of the memory being used and the  
memory remaining for Multimedia, Text, Push, and Configuration  
Messages. The display shows the total space including the used  
and free space. You can also view how much space is currently  
occupied by each message box.  
4. Touch Save to store the text to the Text Template folder.  
Multimedia Templates  
1. Touch  
➔
Messaging  
➔
Used Space.  
1. Touch  
Templates  
2. Touch Create  
➔
Messaging  
➔
Templates  
➔
Multimedia  
2. Touch a particular folder for review or both size and  
.
contents within the selected folder.  
.
3. When you have finished, press  
.
3. Touch the empty onscreen text field and use the onscreen  
keyboard to enter a message. You can rotate the phone to  
use the qwerty keyboard. For more information, refer to  
“Entering Text” on page 40.  
4. Touch OK  
.
5. Touch Insert to place a picture, video, or audio file into the  
message.  
6. Touch Add to include the selected picture, video, or audio  
into the template.  
7. Touch More  
➔
Save as Template.  
Messaging  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Section 12: Games & Apps  
Games & Apps  
The Games & Apps menu option allows you to shop games and  
applications using the WAP browser. You can download new  
games and applications, then save them to the Games & Apps  
folder.  
• MobiTV  
• MobiVJ  
• Monopoly Here & Now  
• Ms. PAC-MAN by Namco  
• MusicID 2  
1. Touch  
➔
Games & Apps.  
• The Weather Channel 4.1  
• WHERE  
2. Select one of the following options:  
• XM Radio  
• Shop Games  
• Shop Applications  
• Tumbling Dice  
• AllSport GPS  
• AT&T Navigator  
• AT&T Social Net  
• Diner Dash 2  
• Loopt  
• Yellowpages  
3. Follow the onscreen instructions.  
Shop Games  
1. Touch  
➔
Games & Apps ➔ Shop Games to launch  
the WAP browser.  
2. Follow the onscreen options. The file is downloaded and  
stored in the Games & Apps folder.  
• MEdia Mall 2.0  
• Midnight Pool 2  
• Mobile Banking  
• Mobile Email  
Note: Service charges and subscription purchase may be required.  
3. To access a pre-installed game, touch a game from the  
available list.  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
For more information, refer to “AppCenter” on page 120.  
Shop Applications  
1. Touch  
➔
Games & Apps ➔ Shop Applications to  
launch the WAP browser.  
2. Follow the onscreen options to purchase the new  
application. The file is downloaded and stored in the  
Games & Apps folder.  
3. To access a new application, touch the entry from the  
available list.  
Games & Apps  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Section 13: AppCenter  
The AppCenter allows you to shop for Ringtones, Games, Cool  
Tools/Apps, Videos, Color Graphics, Answer Tones, and  
Multimedia using the built-in browser. You can also access the  
MEdia Home site.  
Note: You can retrieve the messages from the server and then save the items  
in your phone’s memory. You cannot forward these messages to other  
people or add the saved items to a Multimedia message.  
Ringtones  
ᮣ
Touch  
➔
AppCenter. This then launches the AppCenter  
This option allows you to shop for ringtones using the built-in  
browser.  
application.  
Downloading Multimedia Files  
1. Touch  
➔
AppCenter  
➔
Ringtones. You may have to  
You can buy a variety of multimedia files, such as ringtones,  
graphics, applications, Multimedia content, and so on from the  
WAP browser. Your phone has embedded links to the web sites  
providing you with download services, preset by your service  
provider.  
touch an onscreen entry twice, once to select it and a  
second time to navigate to that page.  
2. Follow the on-screen options. Purchase options include:  
Answer Tones, Full Track Music, Voice Tones, and Sound  
Effects.  
1. Touch  
2. Touch an onscreen entry such as: Ringtones  
Tools/Apps, Videos, Color Graphics, or Answer Tones  
To access the homepage for the online shopping mall, touch MEdia  
➔
AppCenter.  
,
Games, Cool  
Games  
.
This option allows you to shop for games using the built-in  
browser.  
•
Net Home  
.
1. Touch  
➔
AppCenter  
➔
Games. You may have to  
3. Find the item you want to download and follow the  
touch an onscreen entry twice, once to select it and a  
second time to navigate to that page.  
onscreen instructions to purchase it.  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
2. Follow the on-screen options to purchase a game.  
second time to navigate to that page.  
2. Follow the on-screen options to purchase a color graphic.  
Answer Tones  
This menu option allows you to shop for answer tones using the  
built-in browser.  
Cool Tools/Apps  
1. Touch  
➔
AppCenter  
➔
Cool Tools/Apps. You may  
have to touch an on-screen entry twice, once to select it  
and a second time to navigate to that page.  
1. Touch  
➔
AppCenter  
➔
Answer Tones. You may have  
2. If prompted to accept a redirection, touch Ok  
.
to touch an onscreen entry twice, once to select it and a  
second time to navigate to that page.  
3. Follow the on-screen options to purchase a Tool or  
Application.  
2. If prompted to accept a redirection, touch Ok  
.
Videos  
1. Touch  
3. Follow the on-screen options to purchase an answer tone.  
➔
AppCenter  
➔
Videos. You may have to  
touch an on-screen entry twice, once to select it and a  
second time to navigate to that page.  
2. If prompted to accept a redirection, touch Ok  
.
3. Follow the on-screen options to purchase a Video.  
Color Graphics  
This menu option allows you to shop for graphic images using  
the built-in browser. You can download new images to your  
Pictures folder.  
1. Touch  
➔
AppCenter  
➔
Color Graphics. You may have  
to touch an onscreen entry twice, once to select it and a  
AppCenter  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Section 14: AT&T Music  
AT&T Music provides you access to Streaming Music, Music  
Videos, Music communities, Music applications, and allows you  
to both identify and purchase music directly from your handset.  
Shuffle mode button:  
• Shuffle On: the current list of songs are  
randomly shuffled for playback.  
Music Player  
The Music Player is an application that can play music files. The  
music player supports files with extensions AAC, MP3, WMA,  
3GP, MP4, and M4A. Launching the Music Player allows you to  
navigate through your music library, play songs, and create  
playlists.  
• Shuffle Off: songs play in order and are not  
shuffled.  
Equalizer button:  
Equalizer presets include: NORMAL, ROCK, POP,  
DANCE, CLASSICAL, JAZZ, WIDE, DYNAMIC, and  
SURROUND.  
NORM  
Using the Music Player  
1. Touch  
➔
AT&T Music  
➔
Music Player.  
Repeat button:  
2. Touch a library category (all music, artist, album, or  
• Repeat one: repeats the currently playing  
song.  
playlist) to view the available music files.  
3. Scroll through the list of songs and touch an entry to begin  
• Repeat all: replays the current list when the  
list ends.  
playback.  
• Play All: plays the current song list once.  
Music Player Functions  
ᮣ
Touch any of the following onscreen buttons during playback  
to activate their features:  
• Plays the previous song.  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
Adding Music to your Handset  
• Touch once to play the current song.  
• Touch once to pause the current song.  
Music files (ringtones and full tracks) can be added to your  
handset by using one or more of the following methods:  
•
Purchase and download music and ringtones directly to your handset  
over your wireless carrier’s network by using the AT&T Music – Shop  
Music feature (also accessible from My Stuff).  
• Advances to the next song.  
Note: Audio files smaller than 300 KB are treated as ringtones, whereas  
audio files larger than 300 KB are stored in the Music Folder.  
You can not assign an MP3 file larger than 300 KB as a ringtone.  
ᮣ
Touch the player menu options at the bottom of the screen to  
reveal additional menu functions:  
•
Transfer music files from a personal computer using a media player  
TM  
•
•
•
Library: displays the Music Player library view (Now Playing, All Music,  
Artist, Album, Playlists, and Shop Music).  
application and an optional USB Data Cable and an optional microSD  
Memory Card.  
Minimize: reduces the player and leaves it running in the background  
so that you can navigate to other programs or activities.  
More: provides access to options such as:  
Note: When the Bluetooth feature is active on your handset, USB  
communication is not be available.  
To transfer files to your handset, turn off the Bluetooth functionality  
(
Settings  
➔
Connectivity  
➔
Bluetooth). (For more information, refer to  
–
Add to Playlist: allows you to add the current audio file to a selected  
“Bluetooth” on page 67.)  
playlist.  
–
Send via: allows you to send the current file via a message attachment  
or as a data file delivered to a Bluetooth-capable device.  
Settings: allows you to access the Background Playing Settings menu.  
Properties: allows you to view details for the current song such as  
Name, Format, Size, Forwarding, Date created, and Location.  
Note: The maximum number of songs you can synchronize between your  
phone and your PC is 1500.  
–
–
Shop Music  
AT&T Music can be used to shop for ringtones, Answer Tones™  
and songs from some of your favorite music stores.  
AT&T Music  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
1. Touch  
This launches the built-in browser.  
2. Select your music store of choice (or select Ringtones).  
➔
AT&T Music  
➔
Music Player  
➔
Shop Music  
.
4. Use the USB adapter cable to connect the handset to the  
target PC. When an active connection has been  
established, a USB icon (  
) appears on the phone.  
3. From the Categories listing, select the desired entry. Touch  
Note: If the target computer does not detect the newly connected handset or  
provide an MTP Player dialog window on the PC screen, please follow  
steps 5 - 9.  
to return to the previous page.  
4. Exit the browser at any time by pressing  
.
5. Touch  
➔
Settings  
➔
Connectivity  
➔
Select USB Mode  
Transferring Music from the Digital Music Stores  
➔
Mass Storage/Media Player (for MTP). For more  
In order to download music from the computer to your handset, a  
microSD card and USB data cable are required. These items are  
sold separately; go to www.wireless.att.com/cell-phone-service/  
information, refer to “Configuring Your Phone’s USB  
Settings” on page 70.  
accessories/  
.
6. Once the USB connection has been established, the  
handset displays “Connected” and the computer screen  
then shows your device. If the detection occurs, skip to  
step 8.  
1. Using your computer, open your preferred Windows Media  
Digital Rights Management (WMDRM) PC music  
management client.  
2. Download the selected song to your library.  
7. Locate the song on your computer and using your right  
mouse button, click Copy  
.
Note: If the music file is protected, Media Player will block the playing or  
synching of that file.  
8. Open the Removable Disk drive corresponding to the  
microSD card location on the phone.  
3. Verify the pre-insertion of the microSD card into the  
handset. For more information, refer to “Installing the  
Memory Card” on page 7.  
9. Open the Music folder (ex:\\Audio\Music) you wish to  
upload from the handset.  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
10. Using your right mouse button, click Paste. This step  
Playing Music while Using the Phone  
begins the download process.  
The Music Player allows you to play music in the background  
while performing other tasks on your phone. The music will  
pause when an incoming call is accepted, and the music will  
resume when the call is ended. Music will continue to play when  
you receive a Text Message, Multimedia Message, or an Instant  
Message.  
Note: The Music Player does not necessarily support all features of a  
particular file format nor all the variations of those formats. The Music  
Player includes support for Windows Media Digital rights Management  
(WMDRM) which allows you to play some purchased or subscription  
content. Copyright protections may prevent some images, music  
(including ringtones) and other content from being copied, modified,  
transferred or forwarded.  
The other functions you can use are:  
•
•
Call: make or receive a call (music player is paused)  
Playing Music through a Stereo Bluetooth Device  
Messaging: send or receive a text or multimedia message. Music  
continues to play unless an audio clip is received as a part of a  
multimedia message.  
Your device supports the Stereo Bluetooth profile (A2DP), and  
when connected to a stereo Bluetooth headset, will play back  
music in stereo from the phone through the headset.  
•
•
Mobile Web: browse the web (music continues to play).  
Music Player: turns on Music Player, or allows you to use full-screen  
controls of the music player.  
1. Pair and connect your handset to a stereo Bluetooth  
device. For more information, refer to “Connecting to Other  
Bluetooth Devices” on page 68.  
•
Games & Apps: lets you play games or access applications while  
listening to music.  
2. From the list of compatible devices, select the previously  
paired Bluetooth headset to begin listening to your song  
through the headset.  
Important!: When you are finished using the Music Player function, you  
must press  
to stop the function to prevent the battery from  
losing its charge. Pausing the player will continue to use the  
battery.  
3. Touch  
➔
AT&T Music  
➔
Music Player  
➔
All Music.  
4. Select a song to play within the Music Player.  
AT&T Music  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Music Player Settings  
AT&T Music  
2. Touch On or Off to either activate or deactivate the  
Adding Songs to a Playlist  
AT&T Music  
2. Touch a previously created playlist from the list and touch  
Add  
1. Touch  
➔
➔
Music Player  
➔
Settings  
.
1. Touch  
➔
➔
Music Player  
➔
Playlists.  
Background Playing option. This determines whether you  
.
want the music to play in the background while outside of  
3. Touch any available music files to place a checkmark  
alongside their entry (indicating their selection).  
– or –  
the player.  
Save  
3. Touch  
.
Touch Select All to select all available songs from the list.  
Using Playlists  
Playlists are used to assign songs to a list of preferred media  
which can then be grouped into a list for later playback. These  
Playlists can be created via either the handset’s Music Player  
options menu or from within a 3rd party music application (such  
as Windows Media Player) and then downloaded to the handset.  
4. Touch Add and wait for the songs to be added to the  
current playlist.  
Changing the order of songs in a Playlist  
1. Touch  
➔
AT&T Music  
➔
Music Player  
➔
Playlists.  
Creating a Playlist  
2. Touch a previously created playlist.  
1. Touch  
Tap to Create  
➔
AT&T Music  
➔
Music Player  
➔
Playlists  
➔
3. Touch and hold one of the songs. The color bar changes  
.
color.  
2. Touch the ivory playlist name field and use the onscreen  
4. Drag the song to the new location.  
keyboard to enter a descriptive name for the new playlist.  
OK  
Save  
3. Touch  
➔
to complete the creation process.  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Removing songs from a Playlist  
AT&T Music  
2. Touch a previously created playlist from the list and touch  
Remove  
Note: The Napster application can be downloaded at www.napster.com.  
1. Touch  
➔
➔
Music Player  
➔
Playlists  
.
Subscription fees may apply.  
2. Touch  
➔
Settings  
➔
Connectivity  
➔
Select USB Mode  
.
➔
Mass Storage/Media Player (for MTP). For more  
3. Touch any available music files to place a checkmark  
alongside their entry (indicating their selection).  
– or –  
information, refer to “Configuring Your Phone’s USB  
Settings” on page 70.  
3. Use the USB adapter cable to connect the handset to the  
Touch Select All to select all available songs from the list  
target PC. When an active connection has been  
for removal.  
established, a USB icon (  
) appears on the phone.  
4. Touch Remove and wait for the songs to be deleted from  
4. Once the USB connection has been established, the  
handset displays “Connected” and the computer screen  
then shows your phone.  
the current playlist.  
Transferring Music using a Media Application  
A USB cable, microSD card, and a current version of a media  
application (such as Napster or Windows Media Player ) are  
required for this procedure.  
Note: If the target computer does not detect the newly connected handset or  
provide an MTP Player dialog window on the PC screen, see  
®
®
“Transferring Music from the Digital Music Stores” on page 124.  
1. Open the media player on your personal computer (if you  
are using Windows Media Player, use version 10.0 or  
higher).  
Note: The following steps reflect the procedure used with Windows Media  
Player. If you are using either Napster, or some other form of media  
player, you should refer to that application’s Help files for specific  
directions.  
AT&T Music  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5. If this is your first time connecting the a877 to Windows  
Media Player you will need to enter a unique name for this  
phone connection (ex: a877 Card). This assigns a name to  
both the phone (when recognized) and to the internal  
microSD card.  
Note: This upper-right area also indicates the amount of free storage space  
left on the internal microSD.  
Current selected source  
Playlists  
(indicating the internal microSD card)  
Name for microSD storage card  
6. Click Finish to continue onto the application. You will then  
notice the Sync tab active and displaying a connection with  
the phone and displaying the name you created.  
Sync button  
a877 Music  
Library  
7. From within the Windows Media Player application, click  
on the Sync tab. Available songs are then listed on the left  
side of the application.  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10. Click on the Library entry (from the left column) and select  
a category to reveal available songs.  
11. Click a song from the center column and drag it into the  
Sync List section of the current page. This then places the  
current song on a “wait list” for update to the target  
location within the phone.  
12. Click the Start Sync button (at the bottom of the Sync List)  
to begin uploading the selected songs to your handset. A  
“synchronization in progress” message appears on the  
application. Do not unplug the handset during this process.  
Once complete, a Sync Results folder then appears below  
the device entry to indicate sync status.  
13. It is now safe to unplug the USB connector from the  
handset.  
Sync List  
Importing a Playlist from Windows Media Player  
1. Open Windows Media Player on your computer (version  
10.0 or higher).  
8. If not already active, click the Sync tab.  
9. Choose the destination location for the media files. The  
a877 Card entry (you named) appears in a drop-down list  
on the left side of the screen.  
2. Use the USB adapter cable to connect the handset to the  
target PC. When an active connection has been  
established, a USB icon (  
) appears on the phone.  
AT&T Music  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Once the USB connection has been established, the  
handset displays “Connected” and the computer screen  
then shows your phone.  
2. Select any of the following options by touching an entry:  
• Identify Song: begins the analysis of the song being sampled  
through the handset’s microphone.  
• Explore: allows you to search for songs, see the most popular IDs,  
or view the top songs by genre.  
Note: If the target computer does not detect the newly connected handset or  
provide an MTP Player dialog window on the PC screen, see  
• My Songs: displays a list of the last 11 songs your have identified  
or saved. Use this option to quickly get back to your favorite songs.  
“Transferring Music from the Digital Music Stores” on page 124.  
• My Account: allows you to get help on getting started, change your  
subscription settings, view FAQs (Frequently Asked Questions), and  
see information on the version and UserID for MusicID 2.  
4. If not already active, click the Sync tab.  
5. Locate the Playlist section (upper-left).  
To exit the application at any time, touch the QUIT softkey or  
6. Right-click a playlist entry and select Add to ‘Sync List’.  
press  
.
7. Click the Start Sync button (at the bottom of the Sync List)  
Using Identify Song  
to begin uploading the selected playlist to your handset.  
1. Touch  
2. Place the handset’s microphone up to the source of the  
song, which can be from either a radio, stereo, or headset.  
➔
AT&T Music  
➔
MusicID 2  
➔
Identify Song.  
8. It is now safe to unplug the USB connector from the  
handset.  
MusicID 2  
3. Touch Start  
.
MusicID 2 is an application which uses the onboard microphone  
to analyze a music sample and then identify the song. Once the  
application completes the analysis of the song sample, it then  
provides you with the name of the song, artist and album art as  
well as opportunities to buy related content.  
The handset then begins to analyze the audio signal and  
displays “Listening” then “Analyzing” in the top right  
corner of the screen. If a song match is found, the screen  
displays the Artist Name, Track Title, and Album cover art,  
if available.  
1. Touch  
➔
AT&T Music  
➔
MusicID 2.  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4. To purchase the song, touch Ringtones  
,
Full Songs, or  
• FAQs: provides a list of the most Frequently Asked Questions.  
• About MusicID: provides information about the MusicID software  
Answer Tones depending on the format that you wish to  
version and your MusicID 2 UserID.  
buy.  
Exiting from the MusicID 2 Application  
5. To share the song ID with another user, touch Share  
.
ᮣ
Exit the application by simply pressing  
➔
Yes.  
6. Use the QWERTY keypad enter the recipients phone  
XM Radio  
number. Touch Send once complete.  
This service allows you to stream over 20 channels of  
commercial free music through your handset.  
Within a short time they will receive a message containing  
a MusicID 2 link to the song.  
Note: Since this product uses a large amount of data in its stream process,  
you should note that you are responsible for all data charges incurred.  
It is recommended that you subscribe to a MEdia Max data bundle so  
that you are not charged for data overages.  
7. If the song can not be found, the handset displays a “Sorry,  
No Match Try Again!” message. Touch NEW ID and try  
analyzing the song again.  
Note: XM Radio does not work with Bluetooth. Periodically, the application  
To exit the application at any time, simply press  
.
will ask the customer to confirm they are still listening to the stream.  
Getting Help with MusicID 2  
1. Touch  
➔
AT&T Music  
➔
XM Radio.  
1. Touch  
➔
AT&T Music  
➔
MusicID 2  
➔
My Account.  
The screen displays a list of helpful topics related to the  
musicID application. These topics cover:  
2. During the initial setup, touch OK to acknowledge the data  
service usage information and verify your subscription.  
• Getting Started: provides basic information about MusicID 2.  
Note: This is a paid service, initially you will only be allowed a 10 minute trial  
• Subscription Settings: allow you to check your subscription status.  
If you are subscribed and wish to unsubscribe, touch the  
Unsubscribe button.  
period before you have to register for the paid service.  
AT&T Music  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3. Touch Accept to agree to the terms of the XM Radio service  
Music Video Options  
and follow the on screen prompts.  
While playing a music video channel, touch Guide to view the  
channel guide listing.  
4. Select a radio station category from the guide list.  
5. Select a specific radio channel to start the music  
Note: This service requires a subscription. You will have a trial period, after  
which a fee will be applied.  
streaming to your phone.  
6. Touch Buy to purchase the music content associated to the  
1. Touch  
➔
AT&T Music  
➔
Music Videos  
➔
Guide.  
selected channel.  
2. From the main Music Video homepage, touch Options.  
Music Videos  
Music Videos provides links to music video channels that are  
organized by music genres.  
To view Help content and access video player options, select  
from the following:  
•
•
Full Screen - enlarges the picture to fill the entire screen.  
Get Ringtones - allows you to purchase ringtone content associated  
with the video content that is currently playing.  
1. Touch  
➔
AT&T Music  
➔
Music Videos.  
You are then taken to the MobiVJ Music Videos application.  
•
•
•
Buy - allows you to purchase a monthly subscription.  
Mute - silences the audio in the application.  
Help/Settings - provides information on how to use the application &  
information about subscriptions.  
2. During the initial setup, touch OK to acknowledge the data  
service usage information and verify your subscription.  
3. Touch Accept to agree to the terms of the MobiVJ service  
and follow the on screen prompts. A welcome video is then  
displayed.  
Viewing a Video Clip  
ᮣ
Touch the video clip to begin the streaming playback.  
After the stream has been buffered into memory, you can choose  
to either Pause or play the content.  
4. Touch a desired video station to view music videos.  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Community  
The Community is a place where you can find a listing of various  
fan sites that provide sound clips, wallpapers, bios,  
discographies, and other information about an artist.  
1. Touch  
➔
AT&T Music  
➔
Community.  
2. Select a fan site and follow the onscreen instructions.  
3. Exit the application by simply pressing  
.
Music Applications  
The Music Applications option accesses the internet to provide  
Music tools for your handset. Services provided on this site may  
include MusicID 2, MobiRadio, Billboard Mobile Channel, MobiTV,  
Live TV, and MobiTV en Español.  
1. Touch  
➔
AT&T Music  
➔
Music Applications.  
2. Select a music site and follow the onscreen instructions.  
AT&T Music  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Section 15: AT&T GPS  
AT&T GPS provides you with access to real-time GPS-driven  
applications. These programs not only allow you to achieve  
real-time GPS enabled turn-by-turn navigation, but also access  
local searches based on a variety of category parameters. The  
system is also future upgradeable via the purchase of additional  
GPS applications.  
Launching AT&T Navigator  
1. Touch AT&T GPS AT&T Navigator.  
➔
➔
2. Read the warning disclaimer and touch Agree to  
acknowledge the terms of use.  
3. Touch Yes to take a brief tour of the AT&T Navigation  
features and functionality, or Exit to continue to the main  
navigation screen.  
Global GPS turn-by-turn navigation—mapping and Point of  
Interest content for three continents, including North America  
(U.S., Canada, and Mexico), Western Europe, and China where  
wireless coverage is available from AT&T or its roaming  
providers.  
Using the Navigator  
Although your phone does not come with left and right softkeys,  
these are available as onscreen buttons so you can activate their  
corresponding features.  
AT&T GPS is an audible and visual, JAVA-based driving aid that  
uses a GPS signal to provide turn-by-turn directions.  
1. Touch  
➔
AT&T GPS  
➔
AT&T Navigator.  
The application is a separately licensed product that requires you  
to download the feature to your handset, and accept the license  
agreement before using. A trial period is provided for you to test  
it for your own use.  
2. Select an option and follow the onscreen instructions to  
activate a Navigator features.  
• Drive To: lets you get driving directions from wherever you are to  
wherever you’re going. Choices include:  
Important!: You must have a data plan to use this feature.  
–
–
–
My Favorites: displays your favorite (marked) GPS navigation sites.  
Recent Places: displays your recently entered locations.  
Address: displays manually entered locations.  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
–
Intersection: used to locate a specific address by using two separate  
street addresses to identify an intersection. These can be entered either  
manually (Type It) or by speaking into the phone (Speak It).  
Obtaining Driving Directions  
The a877’s built-in GPS hardware allows you to get real-time  
driving directions to selected locations or establishments based  
on your current location.  
–
–
City: allows you to enter a city, State and/or Province for navigation.  
Businesses: allows you to enter a business type or name, category, or  
location.  
Using a Physical Address  
–
Airports: allows you to use either local airports based on current a GPS  
location or manually enter the 3-letter airport code or name.  
1. Touch  
Address  
2. Touch either Type It or Speak It  
➔
AT&T GPS  
➔
AT&T Navigator  
➔
Drive To  
➔
➔
OK.  
• Search: allows you to search for the address by either speaking it  
or by entering the information manually. This function lets you  
search for locations from options such as: Food/Coffee, Gas  
Stations, Gas By Price, Banks/ATMs, WiFi Spots, Parking Lots  
Hotels & Motels, and Movie Theaters.  
.
• Type It: requires that you enter the physical address using either  
the keypad or onscreen keyboard.  
• Speak It: enables the voice response unit and translates voice to  
text.  
• Maps and Traffic: provides access to 2D and 3D maps for both  
your current location and for several categories of locations such  
as Airports and Contacts.  
3. If typing in the address, touch the following fields and use  
the onscreen alphanumeric keypad to enter the necessary  
• Tools & Extras: provides additional features such as sharing your  
location with contacts, recording your current location, creating and  
storing My Favorites locations, accessing the product tour, enabling  
a real-time compass, and setting detailed application preferences.  
information:  
OK  
• Street: used to enter a street address. Touch  
to complete.  
to complete.  
OK  
• City: to enter the city for the address. Touch  
3. Press  
to return to the Main menu.  
• State/Province or ZIP/Postalcode: additional information that can  
provide a more detailed search. Touch to complete.  
OK  
Note: These services require the purchase of a subscription.  
4. Touch Done to begin the search process and receive  
driving directions from the GPS network.  
5. Follow both the onscreen and audio directions.  
AT&T GPS  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
• Yelp: allows you to search for the address, phone numbers, and  
reviews of restaurants, shopping, arts and entertainment, and  
hotels and travel.  
Shopping for GPS Applications  
1. Touch AT&T GPS Shop GPS Apps.  
➔
➔
2. Follow the onscreen prompts to purchase additional GPS  
• Eventful Events: allows you to search for in Music, Performing  
Arts, Sports, Single, Social, Food, Cuisine, Wine, and Family Fun  
categories.  
Applications.  
Where  
• GasBuddy: allows you research gas pricing in your area.  
WHERE™ is a downloadable mobile application that uses your  
current location (obtained via the built-in GPS) to help you find  
places of interest, things to do, and local information while you’re  
on the go.  
• AccuWeather: allows you to check the local weather.  
• Insider Alerts: allows you to insider alert information for your  
current area.  
3. Use the navigation keys to select an option and follow the  
1. Touch  
➔
AT&T GPS  
➔
Where. A seven-day free trial  
onscreen prompts.  
period is provided with a notice that if you do not cancel  
within seven days then you are charged for the GPS  
service.  
Note: These services require the purchase of a subscription.  
Important!: After the trial period, charges for Where service apply. Contact  
your service provider for details.  
2. Touch OK to accept the Terms of Service.The following  
menu options then appear in the display:  
• add free widgets: allows you to download and manage your  
widgets.  
• Starbucks: allows you to locate the nearest Starbucks.  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Section 16: Tools  
Tools are feature options that allow you to use your handset for a  
variety of non-phone related activities. To access any of the tools,  
perform the following:  
2. To start recording, touch  
. Record a memo by  
speaking into the microphone.  
3. During the recording process you can either touch Stop  
) to stop the recording or Pause ( ) to  
ᮣ
Touch  
➔
My Stuff  
➔
Tools.  
(
The on-board tools and applications (such as camera,  
camcorder, calendar, and alarms) can be supplemented with  
additional applications which can be purchased through  
AppCenter. For more information, refer to “AppCenter” on  
page 120.  
temporarily halt the recording. Once the audio recording  
has stopped, the message is automatically saved.  
4. Once stopped, choose from one of the following options:  
• Play: allows you to play the memo.  
Camera  
• Record: allows you to save the current memo and begin another  
session.  
For more information, refer to “Camera” on page 99.  
• Delete: allows you to delete the current memo.  
Record Audio  
• More: provides these additional functions.  
Record Audio allows you to record voice memos. It also allows  
you to send your audio clip to other people as an attachment of  
an MMS message. Recording time will vary based on the  
available memory within the phone.  
–
–
–
Send via: allows you to send your voice clip to other people using either  
a message or to a Bluetooth device.  
Set as: allows you to set the music file as a Call Ringtone, a Caller  
Ringtone for a specific entry or an Alarm Tone.  
1. Touch  
➔
My Stuff  
➔
Tools ➔ Record Audio. For  
Properties: displays the Name, Format, Size, etc., of the current voice  
memo.  
more information, refer to “Record Audio Settings” on  
5. To exit, press  
or press  
.
page 72.  
Tools  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Recorded Audio Folder  
• Alarm Repeat: use this option to set the repeating status for the  
alarm by placing a checkmark alongside those days you would like  
to use for the current alarm. Everyday places a checkmark  
alongside all days.  
This folder shows a list of audio clips that have been recorded  
and saved. To access this folder, use the following steps:  
1. Touch  
➔
My Stuff  
➔
Audio  
➔
Recorded Audio.  
• Snooze: use this option to set a Snooze Duration (5, 10, 15, 20, or  
30 Minutes) and a Snooze Repeat (1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 Times).  
2. Touch a pre-recorded memo from the list to begin  
• Set Details: allows you modify some additional features:  
playback.  
–
–
–
Alarm Type sets the way in which the alarm sounds when activated  
(Melody, Vibration, Vibration then Melody, and Vibration & Melody).  
3. To exit, press  
or press  
.
Alarm Tone sets the sound file which is played when the alarm is  
activated.  
Alarms  
This feature allows you to both set the alarm to ring at a specific  
time.  
Alarm Volume adjusts the alarm’s volume (1 - 7).  
2. Touch Save to store the alarm details and Save again store  
1. Touch  
➔
My Stuff  
➔
Tools  
➔
Alarms  
➔
Tap to  
this new event.  
Create. The following options display:  
3. Touch On from the Auto Power-up field to keep the alarm  
event active even if the phone is turned off. Activating this  
feature turns the phone on and sounds the alarm even if  
the phone was previously is a powered-off state.  
• Alarm Name: allows you to use a specific name for the alarm. The  
name will appear on the display when the alarm activates.  
• Alarm Time: use either the Up/Down input arrows or scroll through  
the available fields to set the new time for the event, at which time  
an alarm will sound. Touch Set to save the new values.  
Note: To stop the alarm when it rings, locate the Stop slider on the screen  
Note: To change the time format, see “Time & Date” on page 60.  
and slide it across to the right until the alarms stops, or you can also  
press any key, such as: volume,  
,
, etc.  
Note: You can set up to 10 different alarms.  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
5. Touch the Alarm field and select a time for the alarm to  
begin alerting you of the upcoming event. Touch Save to  
store the new alert time.  
Calendar  
The calendar feature allows you to view the Month, Week, and  
Day layout views. It also shows any Missed Alarm Events that  
have occurred.  
•
Choices include: Off, On Time, 30 Minutes Before, 1 Hour Before, 1  
Day before, 1 Week Before, Customize (your own defined  
schedule).  
Creating a New Event  
1. Touch  
Event  
➔
My Stuff  
➔
Tools  
➔
Calendar  
➔
Create  
6. Touch Set Details to configure additional parameters for the  
.
new event:  
2. Touch the Title field and use the onscreen keyboard to  
enter a name for this specific event. Touch OK to save the  
new name.  
• End Date: enter final date for this event to occur. This is useful if the  
alarm is for a repeating event. Touch Set to store the date.  
• End Time: enter final time for this repeating event. Touch Set to  
store the time.  
3. Touch the Start Date field and use either the Up/Down  
arrows or scroll through the available fields to set the new  
date. Touch Set to complete the process.  
• Details: enter a description for this event. Touch OK to store the  
name.  
• Location: enter a location for this event. Touch OK to store the  
name.  
4. Touch the Start Time field and use either the Up/Down  
arrows or scroll through the available fields to set the new  
time. Touch Set to complete the process.  
• AlarmTone: allows you to choose an alarm tone. Once highlighted,  
navigate to the Audio folder and select an audio file. Touch Add to  
assign the file as your new alert tone.  
• Repeat: allows you to set the number of repetitions allowed for this  
appointment (Off, Everyday, Every Week, Every Month, or  
Every Year). Once selected, all remaining alarm settings are  
enabled. Touch Save to store the option.  
Note: Touching and holding down the arrows (up or down) increases the  
speed at which the numbers scroll through each reel.  
Tools  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
• Repeat Until: allows you to set as duration for this appointment by  
Viewing an Event  
1. Touch  
assigning an expiration date.  
➔
My Stuff  
➔
Tools  
➔
Calendar  
➔
Event List.  
Save  
Save  
7. Touch  
➔
to store the new event.  
A listing of all upcoming events is then displayed.  
Other Event Options  
My Stuff  
2. Touch any of the following options:  
2. Touch an event from the Events page to then open that  
1. Touch  
➔
➔
Tools  
➔
Calendar  
➔
More.  
instance.  
3. To exit, press  
or press  
.
• Go to: allows you to manually select a target date for review by  
using the Go To dialer page. Touch Go to be taken to the dialed-in  
date.  
Deleting an Event  
1. Touch  
Delete  
➔
My Stuff  
➔
Tools  
➔
Calendar  
➔
Event List  
• View by Day: allows you to change the Calendar view to display a  
daily event listing.  
➔
.
2. Touch an individual event from the list or touch Select All to  
• Viewby Week: allows you to change the Calendar view to display a  
weekly event listing.  
place a checkmark adjacent to all events.  
• Delete: allows you to remove an event from your Calendar.  
3. Touch Delete  
.
• Calendar Settings: allows you to configure the Calendar’s Starting  
Day (select either Sunday or Monday) and Default View Mode  
(select Month, Week, or Day view).  
4. To exit, press  
or press  
.
Recent Calls  
• Missed Alarm Events: displays any missed events.  
The phone stores the numbers of the calls you’ve dialed,  
received, or missed in the Recent Calls menu. If the number or  
caller is listed in your Address Book, the associated name  
displays.  
• Used Space: displays a list of the different Calendar event  
categories along with the memory allocation for each.  
3. To exit, press  
or press  
.
For more information, refer to “Recent Calls” on page 31.  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Save  
Save  
4. Touch  
Memo  
This option allows you to create memos to add to your events.  
1. Touch My Stuff Tools Memo Create Memo  
➔
to store the new task.  
Tasks  
This menu option allows you to create a “to do” entry of tasks  
which are created in a similar fashion to previously described  
Calendar entries.  
➔
➔
➔
➔
.
1. Touch  
2. Select any of the following options:  
• Title: enter a title for this task (up to 15 characters).  
➔
My Stuff  
➔
Tools  
➔
Tasks  
➔
Tap to Create.  
2. Use the onscreen keyboard to enter a new memo and  
OK  
touch  
.
Calculator  
• Priority: allows you assign the task a priority (High, Medium, or  
Low).  
With this feature, you can use the phone as a calculator. The  
calculator provides the basic arithmetic functions; addition,  
subtraction, multiplication, and division.  
• Start Date: enter a date for this task to begin.  
• Due Date: enter a date for this task to end.  
1. Touch  
➔
My Stuff  
➔
Tools  
➔
Calculator.  
• Status: allows you assign a current project status (Completed or  
Ongoing).  
2. Enter the first number using the onscreen numeric keys.  
3. Touch Set Details to access additional options:  
3. Enter the operation for your calculation by touching the  
• Details: enter a detailed description for this task (up to 100  
characters).  
corresponding onscreen arithmetic function key.  
4. Enter the second number.  
• Alarm: allows you to set a time prior to the event where the event  
alerts will begin.  
5. To view the result, touch equals (=).  
• Alarm Time: enter a time for this alarm to sound. Touch Set to  
assign the new time.  
Converter  
Your phone comes with a built-in conversion application. This  
conversion menu provides the following conversion categories:  
• Alarm Tone: allows you to choose an alarm tone. Once selected,  
navigate to the Audio folder, select a file, and touch Add to assign  
the audio file as the current alarm tone.  
•
Currency  
Tools  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
•
•
•
•
•
Length  
7. To exit, press  
or press  
.
Weight  
World Clock  
Volume  
Area  
The World Clock allows you to view the time of day or night in  
100 different cities around the world, within all 24 time zones.  
World Clock is very useful when traveling because you can view  
not only your home time, but also several other cities you have  
added to the World Clock list. You can also enable or disable the  
visiting time zone DST (Daylight Savings Time), if needed.  
Temperature  
1. Touch  
➔
My Stuff  
➔
Tools  
➔
Converter.  
2. Select the specific converter function by touching one of  
the above onscreen conversion functions.  
1. Touch  
➔
My Stuff  
➔
Tools  
➔
World Clock  
➔
Add.  
•
Each converter function has a field for the type of unit to be  
converted, and the type of unit to convert to. An additional field  
allows you to input the unit amount to convert.  
2. Drag the onscreen map to find the desired global region.  
3. Touch a representative city from a desired area. If the city  
3. Enter the main value by touching the first onscreen value  
area is then correctly highlighted in blue, your selection  
field (top left of the page).  
OK  
was accurately read and you can touch  
– or –  
.
4. Use the popup keypad to enter the necessary value and  
OK  
touch  
.
If not read correctly, repeat the previous two steps until  
your selection is correct.  
5. Touch the drop-down list (upper-right) to then select the  
desired source unit. This is the value you are converting  
Deleting a World Clock Entry  
“
from”.  
1. Touch  
➔
My Stuff  
➔
Tools  
➔
World Clock  
➔
Delete.  
•
The resulting converted values (“to”) are the automatically  
displayed in a list.  
2. Touch the Trash Can (  
) next to the entry you wish to  
delete.  
6. Touch Reset to erase the current values and begin again.  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Timer  
You can use this menu to set a countdown timer. Use a timer to  
count down to an event based on a preset time length (hours,  
minutes, and seconds).  
1. Touch  
➔
My Stuff  
➔
Tools  
➔
Timer.  
2. Select a countdown time length for the alert by setting the  
Hours, Minutes, and Seconds value.  
Note: Touching and holding down the arrows (up or down) increases the  
speed at which the numbers scroll through each reel.  
3. Touch Start to begin the timer and touch Stop to pause the  
timer.  
Stopwatch  
You can use this menu to measure intervals of time.  
1. Touch  
➔
My Stuff  
➔
Tools  
➔
Stopwatch  
➔
Start.  
2. Touch Stop to stop the stopwatch and touch Lap to mark a  
unit of time per lap.  
3. Touch Reset to erase all times recorded.  
Tools  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Section 17: Mobile Web  
Your phone is equipped with a WAP (Wireless Application  
Protocol) browser which allows you to access the Internet. This  
section explains how to access the WAP services of your service  
provider and navigate the Mobile Web browser.  
Browser Window Overview  
Navigation Toolbar  
Magnification  
Accessing the Mobile Web  
The Mobile Web menu option allows you to access your Mobile  
Web homepage using the built-in browser. This page gives you  
quick access to information such as local weather, sports scores,  
horoscope information and quick links to the previously  
mentioned shopping sites.  
ᮣ
In Idle mode, touch  
and touch Mobile Web.  
Web Toolbar  
Tip: You can also access the Mobile Web browser from AppCenter AT&T  
,
Music, and My Stuff by selecting any of the “Shop” options in any of the  
View Mode  
(Mobile/PC Web)  
Screen View  
(Fullscreen/with Toolbar)  
sub-menus.  
Navigation Using the WAP Browser  
Navigation within web pages is all driven via touch points on the  
screen.  
Note: The default view for the browser is to display as much of the web page  
as possible without the Web Toolbar.  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
FullscreenView:indicatesthepageisbeingdisplayed  
in a fullscreen view either in a Portrait or Landscape  
orientation. No toolbars are visible.  
Back: returns you to the previous web page.  
Forward: takes you to the next web page.  
Toolbar View: toggles the state of the onscreen  
Web Toolbar so these onscreen buttons become  
visible.  
Home: returns you to the currently assigned  
homepage.  
ViewMode:togglesbetweenPCWebviewandMobile  
view.  
Reload: reloads the current page with updated  
information.  
Magnify: launches the magnification slider that  
allows you to zoom a web page either in or out using  
the Up or Down Navigation key.  
Add to Favorites: bookmarks the current page and  
marks it as a favorite site.  
Favorites: accesses and displays the bookmarks  
assigned as favorite web pages.  
Browser Settings: accesses the Browser Settings  
menu, which allows you to clear caches, delete  
cookies, access cookie options, delete history,  
change preferences, view the page details, change  
the browser profiles, and view information about the  
browser software.  
Mobile Web  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the Orientation of the Web page  
•
•
Turn the phone on its side to see a Landscape/Widescreen view of  
the current page.  
The a887 comes equipped with an orientation detector that can  
tell if the phone is being held in an upright (Portrait) or sideways  
(Landscape) orientation. This is useful when entering text. If the  
phone is sideways, an onscreen keyboard is displayed. When  
upright, only the alphanumeric keypad is shown.  
Turn the phone upright to see a Portrait view of the current screen.  
Viewing the Page in Full Screen Mode  
By default, only the Navigation Toolbar and Screen View icons are  
displayed on the screen. The Screen View button can be used to  
either reveal the Web Toolbar or remove it to reveal more of the  
current page.  
Portrait  
Magnifying the current page  
From an active page you can toggle the view by touching the  
Screen View button.  
1. Touch  
from the upper-right of the current web page.  
Toolbar View  
(with buttons)  
2. Touch the magnification slider (at the bottom when in  
landscape or on the left when in portrait) and drag to one  
side or another  
– or –  
Touch  
to zoom into the page or  
to zoom out. This  
enlarges or shrinks the size of the displayed page in  
increments.  
Landscape  
– or –  
ᮣ
From within any active web page, change the orientation:  
Press the Up or Down Volume keys to zoom in or out.  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Scrolling Within a Web Page  
Note: The page must be magnified enough so there are unseen areas to  
where you would move to. If the page is already being displayed in its  
entirety, you will not be able to move around it.  
As with other menu items and pages on your phone, scrolling  
requires that steady directional pressure be applied onscreen via  
via your fingertip.  
Accessing the Web Toolbar  
From an active page you can toggle the view by touching the  
Screen View button.  
1. Touch either  
to change the view to Fullscreen without  
Scrolling  
Toolbars. This view maximizes the viewable area of the  
current page.  
– or –  
Touch  
to launch (make visible) the Web Toolbar.  
2. Navigate around the web page.  
Moving around  
Selecting Onscreen Items  
ᮣ
Touch an onscreen item or hyperlink.  
Links, which are displayed as underlined and colored text, allow  
you to jump to other Web pages, select special functions, or even  
activate an application.  
To scroll up or down a Web page  
ᮣ
Touch and slide your finger either up or down on the screen.  
Entering Text Into a Search or Text Field  
To move around a Web page:  
Touch an onscreen text field (such as the Navigation Toolbar)  
once to reveal an onscreen keyboard.  
ᮣ
Drag across the screen in any direction.  
Mobile Web  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Touch a search field twice to display the text input screen and the  
onscreen keyboard. For more information, refer to “Entering  
Text” on page 40.  
Using Favorites  
While navigating through either the Internet or the Mobile Web  
pages, you can bookmark a site to quickly and easily access it at  
a future time. The URLs (web site addresses) of the bookmarked  
sites are stored in the Favorites folder, where you can use the six  
preset favorites and store your own favorite URLs.  
Returning to the Previous Page  
ᮣ
Touch  
bar.  
from the left of the Navigation Toolbar’s Address  
Accessing a Web Site Using Favorites  
Returning to the Homepage  
1. In Idle mode, touch  
➔
Mobile Web  
➔
.
1. Touch  
(Toolbar View) to launch the Web Toolbar.  
2. Touch a bookmark item from the Favorite list. The preset  
2. Touch  
to return to the homepage.  
bookmarks consist of:  
Navigating via a URL Address  
1. In Idle mode, touch Mobile Web  
• My Account  
• Chat Group  
➔
.
2. Touch the URL text field at the top of the screen.  
• News  
• Sports  
3. Use either the onscreen alphanumeric keypad or keyboard,  
• Weather  
to enter the target Web address, beginning with the www  
.
• MEdia Net (homepage)  
Adding Favorites  
The http:// prefix is pre-inserted into the text string.  
Go  
4. Touch  
to launch the new web page, where you  
1. In Idle mode, touch  
New  
➔
➔
Mobile Web  
Mobile Web  
➔
➔
➔
Add  
have the opportunity to also add the new page to your  
Favorites list and assign a display name for the link.  
.
– or –  
In Idle mode, touch  
.
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
2. Touch the Enter URL Address field and use the onscreen  
3. Place a checkmark adjacent to those editable entries you  
alphanumeric keypad to input the desired web address.  
wish to choose for deletion.  
– or –  
OK  
Touch  
to continue.  
Touch Select All to place a checkmark alongside all  
3. Touch the Title field to associate a display name for this  
deleteable fields.  
link. Use the onscreen alphanumeric keypad to input a title  
OK  
for the web address. Touch  
to continue.  
Delete  
4. Touch  
.
Save  
4. Touch  
to store the new Favorite entry.  
Copying a URL to a Message  
Editing Favorites  
Copying a selected URL as text into a message requires that the  
selected URL Address already be saved as a Favorite entry.  
1. In Idle mode, touch  
➔
Mobile Web  
can be edited  
adjacent to a favorite entry. Do not touch the  
➔
.
1. In Idle mode, touch  
Copy URL to Message.  
2. Touch a Favorite entry and touch  
➔
Mobile Web  
➔
➔
More  
•
Only those entries with  
.
➔
2. Touch  
name, as this will launch the assigned web site.  
Done  
.
3. Touch either the Enter URL Address or Title fields and use  
3. Touch the Tap to Add Recipient field to use the onscreen  
the keypad to input the desired web address and title.  
keypad/keyboard to enter the recipients phone number.  
Save  
4. Touch  
to store the changes to the entry.  
4. Continue the creation of the remaining message. For more  
information, refer to “Messaging” on page 108.  
Deleting a Favorite  
1. In Idle mode, touch  
➔
Mobile Web  
➔
.
Sending a URL  
•
Only those entries with  
can be deleted  
.
A selected URL can also be sent as a file attachment within a  
new multimedia message but also transmitted to any paired  
Bluetooth device that can receive the data.  
Delete  
2. Touch  
.
Mobile Web  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
1. In Idle mode, touch  
Send URL via.  
➔
Mobile Web  
➔
➔
More  
you to save the cookies on every page requiring cookies  
(page 151).  
➔
• Delete History: deletes the record of any previously visited web  
sites (page 152).  
2. Touch one of the following options and follow the onscreen  
prompts to complete the process:  
• Preferences  
:
changes the settings for the web browser to suit  
your preference (page 152)  
.
• Message: attaches a selected Favorite URL Address to a new  
multimedia message.  
• Page Details: provides information about a web page including  
Title, Address, Size, MIME type, and Last updated.  
• Bluetooth: sends selected Favorite URL Address as a data file to a  
paired Bluetooth device capable of using the file.  
• Browser Profiles: deletes the current browser profile. For more  
information, refer to “Changing the WAP Profiles” on  
page 154.  
Done  
3. Touch a Favorite entry and touch  
.
Browser Settings  
To configure the parameters on the onboard browser, use the  
Browser Settings page.  
• About Browser: displays the access version and copyright  
information about the browser.  
3. Touch Yes to activate the feature.  
1. In Idle mode, touch  
➔
Mobile Web  
➔
.
– or –  
Save  
2. In Browser Settings, touch any of the following function  
Touch  
to save the new setting.  
fields.  
Clearing Caches  
• Clear Caches: deletes the information stored in the cache. The  
cache stores the most recently accessed pages (page 150).  
A cache is the phone’s temporary memory in which the most  
recently accessed web pages (and their associated images) are  
stored. The cache can be cleared at any time from your phone.  
• Delete Cookies: delete cookies. Cookies are pieces of personal  
information sent to a web server while navigating the web  
(page 151).  
1. In Idle mode, touch  
Caches  
➔
Mobile Web  
➔
➔
Clear  
.
• Cookie Options: sets whether cookies are stored on your phone  
(Accept All or Reject All). If you select Prompt, the phone will ask  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2. At the Clear cache? pop-up, touch Yes to continue, or No to  
• Prompt: allows you to be prompted before a cookie can be placed  
on your phone.  
cancel the operation.  
Save  
3. Touch  
to save the new setting.  
Deleting Cookies  
Using your History  
A cookie is a small file that is placed on your phone by a web site  
during navigation. In addition to containing some site-specific  
information, it can also store some personal information (such as  
username and password) which can pose a security risk if not  
properly managed. Cookies can be deleted at any time from your  
phone.  
The History list provides you with a list of the most recently  
visited web sites. These entries can be used to quickly return  
return to a previously unmarked web pages without the need to  
retype the entire address.  
Accessing your History List  
1. In Idle mode, touch  
Delete Cookies  
➔
Mobile Web  
➔
➔
1. In Idle mode, touch  
➔
Mobile Web.  
.
2. At the Delete cookies? pop-up, touch Yes to continue, or No  
History List  
drop down  
to cancel the operation.  
Setting Cookie Options  
You can define how to manage cookie installation on your phone  
when a web site is attempting to place them on your phone.  
1. In Idle mode, touch  
Cookie Options  
2. Touch one of the following options:  
➔
Mobile Web  
➔
➔
.
2. Touch the Toolbar View (  
) to launch the Web  
• Accept All: allows all cookies to be placed on your phone.  
Toolbar.  
• Reject All: allows no cookies to be placed on your phone.  
Mobile Web  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
3. From the Navigation Toolbar (at the top of the web page)  
touch the History List drop down arrow to reveal the  
current stored list of visited web sites.  
• Search Options  
• Run JavaScript  
• Display Images  
• Display Flash Contents  
• Play Sound  
4. Touch an entry from the list to automatically be taken to  
the selected web site.  
• Display Minimap  
Deleting Your History List  
3. Touch either On (to activate the feature) or Off (to  
deactivate the feature).  
A cache is the phone’s temporary memory in which the most  
recently accessed web pages (and their associated images) are  
stored. The cache can be cleared at any time from your phone.  
Save  
4. Touch  
to save the new setting.  
1. In Idle mode, touch  
Delete History  
➔
Mobile Web  
➔
➔
About Browser  
The About Browser option gives the browser software version  
.
information.  
2. At the Delete History? pop-up, touch Yes to continue, or No  
1. In Idle mode, touch  
Browser  
➔
Mobile Web  
➔
➔
About  
to cancel the operation.  
.
Setting Browser Preferences  
The Preferences option allows you to set your browser’s ability to  
2. Once finished, press  
to return to the previous  
page.  
run JavaScript, display images, and play sounds.  
1. In Idle mode, touch  
Preferences  
➔
Mobile Web  
➔
➔
Accessing the Mobile Web Homepage  
1. In Idle mode, touch Mobile Web. The content of  
.
➔
the start-up homepage contains the following selections:  
2. Activate any of the following by touching an option:  
• Search field: allows you enter a text string into the field and then  
search the Mobile Web database for matches. For more  
• View Mode  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
(WHAT’S HOT, Tones, Games, Pics, and Mobile Video) can not be  
removed, the remaining entries can be toggled on or off. Touch a  
category entry to toggle it on (appear on the page) or off (remove it from  
the homepage).  
information, refer to “Entering Text Into a Search or Text  
Field” on page 147.  
• My Links: provides you with quick access to your those sites which  
you have setup in this category. Touch an entry to launch the site.  
–
–
Parental Controls: provides you with settings which can be configured  
to restrict certain media content from being downloaded on the phone.  
• Categories: provides you with a list of Mobile Web web pages  
containing links to a variety of special interest sites. Touch an entry  
to launch the site. These categories can be edited from within  
Customize MEdia Net.  
Username & Password: allows you to setup a username and  
password prior to gaining access to the Mobile Web homepage and  
related services.  
Note: Prior to using these services, you must complete the Mobile Web  
registration process located at:, www.att.com/wireless or you must  
agree to the terms of the service agreement and setup the service on  
your handset.  
Note: Prior to using this service you must agree to the terms of the service  
agreement and setup the service on your handset.  
–
MEdia Net Mail: allows you to access and edit the entries found within  
the Mobile Web messaging center. Although most of the entries can not  
be removed, the remaining entries can be toggled on or off by  
navigation to the top of the page, touch Edit. From the Mail &  
Messaging page, touch an entry to toggle it on (appears on the Mail &  
Messaging page) or off (remove it from the Mail & Messaging page).  
• My Account: provides you with access to a listing of your most  
recent purchases and available product (services). From the My  
Account screen, touch My Purchases to begin.  
• Customize MEdia Net: provides you with a list of Mobile Web setup  
and service options which allow you to configure different aspects  
of the Mobile Web experience. Touch an entry to launch the option.  
–
–
MEdia Net Tour: allows you to take a quick guided tour through the  
main features of the Mobile Web pages (homepage, navigation, teams,  
etc.).  
–
Edit My Links: provides you with a list of available Internet links which  
you can choose to add to your My Links section of the main Mobile  
Web homepage. To add a link, navigate to the Add to My Links  
section and touch an entry. To remove a link, navigate to the Move/  
Delete Links section and touch an entry. From the Edit My Links page,  
Privacy Policy: provides the web address for Cellular’s Privacy Policy.  
• Help: provides you with list of some of the most frequently asked  
questions regarding Mobile Web functionality. Touch a question to  
launch an on screen description.  
touch Remove  
.
–
Edit Categories: allows you to edit those category entries which  
appear on the Mobile Web homepage. Although the first four entries  
2. To exit the browser at any time, simply press  
.
Mobile Web  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Create  
3. To create a new connection profile, touch  
the onscreen prompts.  
and follow  
Changing the WAP Profiles  
Connection can be made via either one of three available  
connection profiles: MEdia Net, AT&T MMS (MultiMedia Server),  
or AT&T IMS. Use this menu to create and customize the profiles  
containing the settings for connecting your phone to the network.  
You need these settings to use the WAP browser or to send MMS  
messages or Email messages.  
– or –  
To edit an existing profile, touch a profile from list, scroll to  
the desired field, and use the onscreen keypad/keyboard  
to edit the parameter you want to edit:  
• Set Name: enter a profile name.  
Note: Although the active connection can be changed by the user, it is  
recommended that this choice be made with the assistance of either  
the retailer or customer service representative.  
• Access Name: edit the access point name.  
• Auth Type: select the type of authentication used for this WAP  
connection: None, Normal, or Secure.  
1. In Idle mode, touch  
Browser Profiles  
➔
Mobile Web  
➔
➔
• User ID: enter the User ID required to connect to the network.  
.
• Password: enter the user password required to connect to the  
network.  
2. Touch one of the following profiles:  
• MEdia Net  
• AT&T MMS  
• AT&T IMS  
• Protocol: set the connection protocol used by the WAP browser:  
WAP or HTTP.  
• Home URL: enter the URL address of the page to be used as your  
homepage.  
Caution!: The WAPs are pre-configured and can not be altered using this  
screen. If you change the settings without first checking with your  
service provider, the web browser, MMS, and e-mail features may  
not work properly.  
• Gateway Address: (WAP only) enter the gateway address of the  
proxy server.  
• Proxy Address: (HTTP only) set the proxy server address and port.  
• Secure Connection: (WAP only).  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
• Linger Time (sec.): set a time period (in seconds) after which the  
network is disconnected if there has been no new data traffic in that  
time.  
• Advanced Settings: (touch  
) allows you to configure some of  
the IP-specific information: Static IP, Static DNS, Server information,  
and Traffic Class.  
–
Static IP: specify if you want to manually enter an IP address. If you  
want the IP address to be automatically assigned by the server, remove  
the check mark.  
–
–
Local Phone IP: enter the IP address obtained from the network  
operator, if you checked the Static IP option.  
Static DNS: specify if you want to manually enter the Domain Name  
Server (DNS) address. If you want the address to be automatically  
assigned by the server, remove the check mark.  
–
–
Server 1/Server 2: enter the Domain Name Server (DNS) addresses.  
Traffic Class: select the traffic class.  
Save  
4. Touch  
to save these settings.  
The WAP settings may vary depending on the service provider.  
Mobile Web  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 18: PC Studio Media Manager  
Overview  
PC Studio Media Manager allows users to manage and edit  
multimedia files (music, photo and video files), and send music  
files easily to your mobile phone.  
2. Follow the on-screen instructions. The PC Studio Media  
Manager program may take up to 10 minutes to download  
to your computer.  
Note: The USB drivers are automatically installed when PC Studio has been  
downloaded. In the event the drivers do not download correctly, go to  
http://www.samsung.com/us/a877pcstudiomanager and click on the  
driver icon.  
Downloading the PC Studio Media Manager  
Click the following url:  
http://www.samsung.com/us/a877pcstudiomanager  
.
Configuring your Phone's USB Mode  
Connect your phone to a PC using the USB cable included. The  
phone can be configured to launch a default application when an  
active USB connection is detected.  
For more information, refer to “Configuring Your Phone’s USB  
Settings” on page 70.  
Note: The Bluetooth feature must first be disabled before initiating a USB  
connection with the phone. Prior to connecting the USB cable to the  
phone, install the latest version of the PC Studio application. This  
application installs the necessary USB drivers onto your machine.  
1. Select Save to save the files to your computer.  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
NPS File Folders  
PC Studio Media Manager home screen  
Installing PC Studio Media Manager will create NPS music, NPS  
video and NPS photo folders in the NPS folder of My Documents  
on the PC.  
1
2
3
5
6
7
4
Multimedia files from the PC or files of other devices are stored  
and managed in these folders. PC Studio Media Manager scans  
the files in the folders and creates viewer directories.  
You can specify folders other than the default folders, and then  
scan and import files from them. (You can specify a file path in  
Menu  
➔
Settings.) A file imported from the connected device to  
the application is automatically added to the default folders.  
After adding files to the default folders, exiting and restarting PC  
Studio Media Manager will update the files in the viewers  
automatically. If you exit and restart PC Studio Media Manager,  
the last screen prior to the restart will still be maintained.  
8
9
10  
12  
11  
PC Studio Media Manager  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
157  
   
1. My Computer allows you access and manage PC folders  
Toolbox  
1. Click Toolbox  
and files.  
.
2. Music: Opens the Music Manager application.  
3. Photo: Opens the Photo Manager application.  
4. Video: Opens the Video Manager application.  
The Toolbox opens, and it contains the following programs:  
• Music Player: For more information, refer to “Music Player” on  
page 180.  
• Video Player: For more information, refer to “Video Player” on  
page 183.  
5. Search device: Searches a device connected to the PC and  
connects it to the Media Manager.  
• Image Viewer: For more information, refer to “Image Viewer”  
on page 185.  
6. Help: Opens the help files for the Media Manager  
• Video Converter: For more information, refer to “Video  
applications.  
Converter” on page 186.  
7. Connected Device: Shows the device that is connected to  
• Disk Ripping: For more information, refer to “Disk Ripping” on  
page 188.  
the PC.  
• Disk Burning: For more information, refer to “Disk Burning” on  
8. Toolbox: All programs used on-stage are gathered here.  
page 189.  
9. Media Manager: Provides playback function for music,  
User Stage  
A User Stage allows the user to customize the Media Manager  
screen by choosing wallpaper, text color and Toolbox options.  
photo, and video files.  
10. Add User Stage: Add User Stage for Media Manager. For  
more information, refer to “User Stage” on page 158.  
1. Click Add User Stage  
2. Type a name for the user stage in the dialog box, and  
click OK  
A user stage is added to your screen  
.
11. Settings: Setting options for Media Manager.  
.
12. To Web: Drag and drop a multimedia file onto the icon to  
send it to the website.  
.
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3. Right-click on the screen. The following menu appears:  
Music Manager  
• Sort stage: Choose Cascade or Tile.  
Music Manager allows users to manage, store, share and play  
music files on a PC, as well as export and import files to and from  
your Samsung mobile phone.  
• Stage settings: Choose Font color, Background color, and  
Background image.  
• Delete stage: You are prompted to confirm deletion of the current  
File formats supported include MP3, WMA, ASF (sound only), 3GP  
(sound only), WAV, AMR, AAC, M4A, MMF, MID (MIDI), PMD, and  
MP4 (sound only).  
user stage.  
4. Click Media Manager  
to return to the main menu.  
ᮣ
To open the Music Manager, click  
Music.  
Settings  
The Settings menu allows you to manage sound effects, stage  
customization, and connection options:  
1. Click Settings  
.
The Settings menu appears, containing the following three  
tabs:  
• Normal: Allows you to manage your device and initialize stages.  
• Stage: Choose font and background options.  
• Option: Select connection options:  
–
–
–
Run PC Studio automatically when Windows starts.  
Automatically start Device connection monitoring when Windows starts.  
Open New PC Studio automatically when the device is connected.  
PC Studio Media Manager  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
159  
       
Music Manager Menu Bar  
The top menu bar contains the following menus:  
The File Information window shows the following: Title, Duration,  
Artist, Album, Genre, File size, Preference, Release Date, CD  
Number, Track Number, File Type and Description of a currently  
playing music file.  
ᮣ
Click the arrow next to the View all icon to enlarge the window  
and display detailed album and file information.  
•
Menu: Choose from Refresh, Import File from PC, Import Folder from  
PC, Send to Device, Import Device File, Import Playlist, Export Playlist,  
Delete missing files, and Settings.  
Playback Control Bar  
•
•
All: Lists and displays all files in Music Manager.  
Playlist: Sorts items in the Recently Added and Recently Played file  
menus.  
Use the Playback Control Bar to select music settings, check  
status, play and pause the music, and change the volume.  
Stop  
Play/Pause  
Previous  
Repeat  
Next  
•
•
•
•
Release Date: Sorts files based on release date of IID3 tag.  
Genre: Sorts files based on genre of ID3 tag.  
Artist: Sorts files based on artist of IID3 tag.  
Audio CD: Plays an inserted CD.  
Music Manager File Information Window  
Volume  
Shuffle  
Play Status  
•
•
•
Repeat settings: Selects repeat playback types. Choose from No  
repeat Repeat all Repeat one song  
Shuffle settings: Shuffle plays songs on the playlist randomly. Choose  
Shuffle or No Shuffle  
Play status: Displays the current play status (current play time/total  
play time) on the Play button. You can search music by holding down  
and dragging your mouse.  
,
,
.
.
•
Previous button: Plays the previous item on the playlist.  
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
•
•
•
•
Play/Pause button: Plays or pauses a music file.  
Stop button: Stops playing a music file.  
Next button: Plays the next item on the playlist.  
Volume control bar: You can control volume by holding down and  
dragging your mouse left and right.  
below the Application menu.  
2. Click Delete missing files from the menu.  
The process window appears, deleting missing items from  
the list.  
Sending a Ringtone  
View Type  
You can import a ringtone file to PC Studio Media Manager and  
send it to the mobile phone ringtone folder.  
Files can be displayed three ways:  
•
•
List view: Displays items in text format.  
Album list view: Groups items in an album and displays it as text with  
the album art image.  
1. Connect the mobile phone to the PC.  
2. Open My Computer and drag and drop a ringtone file to PC  
•
Cross-album as view: Groups items in an album, allowing users to  
search them by release date, artist and genre, and displays the items  
in the album as text.  
Studio Media Manager.  
3. Move the cursor onto the file, right-click it and select  
Device from the Send to device ringtone folder menu.  
ᮣ
To select view type, click  
Music, and then select the view  
type from the menu bar.  
Note: You can select and send multiple ringtone files. Also, you can select  
the playlist from the top menu and drag and drop it to the My Ringtone  
folder to manage ringtone files only.  
Search  
You can search music files based on Title,  
Artist, Genre, Album, or Release Date. Files are  
searched in descending order alphabetically  
and numerically. If there is no selection  
displayed on the submenu, only the search  
result is shown.  
Deleting Missing Files  
If the music files are deleted or moved to another folder after  
being added, the links to their source files will not be available,  
preventing you from playing them.  
1. Click the Menu button on the left side of the submenu bar  
PC Studio Media Manager  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
161  
 
To search by Artist  
Click the Search button after entering texts.  
To search by Release  
Click the dropdown list, select the release date and then click  
the Search button.  
,
Genre, or Album  
:
2. Click Refresh.  
ᮣ
3. Click OK.  
:
Playlist  
ᮣ
Importing a Playlist  
1. Click Import Playlist from the menu.  
– or –  
To go back to the previous screen:  
1. Click a desired menu or submenu after searching. The  
screen disappears when the Contents menu or the  
submenu is clicked, and the search result is not kept.  
Select Playlist on the top menu, move the cursor onto the  
submenu on the left, right-click, and click Import playlist.  
2. When My Computer opens, select one or several playlist  
2. Select items you want to display on the Sort bar and  
click OK. Only the selected items are displayed on the Sort  
bar.  
data files and click the Open button.  
If the same playlist already exists in Music Manager, a  
pop-up window may appear.  
Note: Move the cursor onto the Sort bar, right-click and check or uncheck a  
The Import Playlist window opens, and the importing  
sort item in the list.  
process starts.  
Refresh  
3. Click Done when Import Playlist is complete.  
Exporting a Playlist  
Clicking the Refresh button on the Menu will import added files to  
Music Manager, and remove deleted files from the PC Studio  
Media Manager list.  
1. From the Music Manager, select Menu ➔ Export Playlist.  
2. When the Explorer opens, select a folder to store files and  
1. Click the Menu button on the left side of the submenu bar  
click OK.  
below the Application menu.  
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. When Export Playlist is complete, click Done.  
Deleting a Playlist  
1. From the Music Manager, click Playlist.  
2. Right-click the Playlist and select Make quick playlist.  
1. Select a playlist you want to delete.  
3. When the Make quick playlist window opens, enter a  
playlist name and use tags to select attributes of the  
playlist.  
2. Right-click and select Delete.  
3. Click OK when the pop-up appears.  
Renaming a Playlist  
4. Click OK.  
Adding to a Playlist  
1. Select a playlist you want to rename.  
1. Highlight an item on the Playlist. Several items can be  
2. Right-click and select Rename Playlist.  
selected.  
3. When the selected playlist is changed into the input  
window, enter a new name and press Enter.  
– or –  
2. Right-click and select Add to Playlist.  
3. Select a desired playlist from the already created playlist  
menu.  
Move the cursor outside of the input window and click  
once.  
If there are no playlists created, you can click New Playlist  
and add the selected item automatically.  
Note: When you rename playlists, the menu order is rearranged in  
Changing Preferences  
alphabetic/numeric descending order.  
You can sort items to your choice by setting preference.  
Making a Quick Playlist  
1. Highlight an item.  
You can automatically filter playlist names and add music files to  
playlists. Add music files to the menu of a new playlist by  
scanning the music files and selecting specific attributes.  
2. Right-click and select Preference  
.
PC Studio Media Manager  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
163  
3. Select one from Score 5 to Score 1 (If you do not want to set  
Note: You cannot drag and drop an item to change the order after sorting.  
preference, select Delete Ranking).  
Photo Manager  
Editing File Information  
Photo Manager allows users to manage, store and share photo  
files on your PC and your Samsung mobile phone.  
Edits and manages the information of a music file.  
1. Highlight a playlist.  
ᮣ
To open the Photo Manager, click  
Photo.  
2. Right-click and select File Information. You can edit  
categories and add a description.  
3. Click OK to save the edits.  
Note: Users can input, edit and save all items.  
Sorting a List  
You can select a sorting type of play items on the playlist.  
ᮣ
Select sorting criteria on the Sort bar at the top of the list.  
The items are sorted automatically according to the sorting  
criteria.  
Photo Manager Menu Bar  
If the triangle points downwards, the items are sorted in a  
descending order, if the triangle points upwards, the items  
are sorted in an ascending order.  
The top menu bar contains the following items:  
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
•
Menu: Choose from Refresh, Import File from PC, Import Folder from  
PC, Send to Device, Import Device File, Delete missing files, Edit,  
Create slide, View slide, Add to Disc Burning, Print, and Settings.  
All: Lists and displays all files in Photo Manager.  
Album: Sorts albums in the Recently Added file menus.  
Time: Sorts items by date.  
Keyword: Sorts items by keyword.  
Preference: Classifies and lists files based on scores set by  
users.  
Photo View type  
You can preview, view details, and view rotating slide functions  
for photo files.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Preview: Displays files as thumbnails. The number of files displayed  
on one screen differs depending on thumbnail size.  
•
•
View details: Displays thumbnails as well as detailed file information.  
View rotating slide: Displays files rotating around the center point.  
To select view type, click  
select the view type from the menu bar.  
Photo and then  
Photo Manager File Information Window  
Photo Search  
The File Information window displays the selected photo files,  
and gives you viewing, searching, and sorting options.  
You can search photo files based on file name, time, and  
keyword.  
•
•
File name search: Enter text and click the Search button.  
Hour search: Click the calendar, select the dates and click the Search  
button.  
•
Keyword search: Enter text and click the Search button.  
ᮣ
To select search type, click  
Photo and then  
select Search from the menu bar.  
Photo Sort  
You can select a sorting type for items displayed on the list.  
ᮣ
To select sort type, click  
the menu bar.  
Photo and then select Sort from  
PC Studio Media Manager  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
165  
The items are sorted automatically according to the sorting  
criteria.  
Formats supported are: BMP, JPG (JPEG), GIF, PNG, and WBMP.  
Export file formats supported are: BMP, JPG (JPEG), GIF, PNG, and  
WBMP.  
Basket/Function Toolbar Area  
1. At the PC Studio Media Manager home page, click  
The Basket is a space used to temporarily store files.  
Photo  
.
2. Select Menu  
➔
Edit.  
Screen Description  
•
Top area: The application name, window function icon and menu  
button are located here.  
•
Basket area: Display photos added to the basket in PC Studio Media  
Manager  
➔
Photo.  
•
•
Viewer area on the left: Display files selected in the basket.  
Edit area on the right: Modify, decorate, save and print photos.  
1. Select Open basket button.  
Basket Menu  
2. Select files in the Viewer, then drag and drop them to the  
Add or delete photo files to or from the basket.  
Basket area.  
•
Add photo: Click the Add button to open the Import pop-up window,  
and then select a photo file to add to the basket.  
3. Select View Slide to display files in the Basket as slides.  
•
Delete photo: Select a photo file in the basket, and then click the  
Delete button to delete it from the basket.  
Photo Editor  
Photo Editor allows users to edit photo files registered to PC  
Studio Media Manager.  
Function Menu  
•
Undo button: Cancel the last operation and move back to the previous  
one.  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
•
•
Redo button: Cancel the last Undo operation.  
Reset button: Cancel the editing operation and move back to the initial  
stage.  
Modify Function  
•
Rotate: If you click the top-bottom inversion or the left-right inversion,  
the photo is inverted based on the centre point. If you click left or right,  
the photo rotates by 90 degrees with each click.  
•
•
View information button: Display information about the file shown on  
the edit screen.  
•
•
•
Remove red eye: Adjust the slide bar to remove the red eye. Select an  
area and move the slide bar left or right to remove the red eye.  
Adjust brightness: Adjust the saturation, brightness and contrast  
slide bars left or right.  
Source comparison button: Compare the edited version with the  
source file.  
•
•
Fit to area button: Fit the photo size displayed to the edit area.  
Fit to actual size button: Fit the photo size displayed to the actual  
size.  
Effects: Use filters to apply effects. Select a desired effect to open the  
pop-up window, and then adjust the slide bar left or right.  
–
–
–
Click OK from the pop-up window to apply the effect.  
Click the Cancel button to cancel the effect.  
Click the Reset button to move the slide bar back to the initial stage.  
•
•
Zoom in/out slide bar: Adjust the photo size displayed in the edit  
area.  
Save button: Save the edited photo with the same path and name as  
the source file.  
•
•
Crop: Select and cut a desired area. Move or resize the area to cut and  
click the Apply button.  
Resize: Resize the photo. Enter a desired size and click the Apply  
button.  
•
•
Save as button: Enter a path and name for the edited photo.  
Print button: Open the Print pop-up window.  
Edit Function  
Decorate Function  
Draw  
–
–
–
–
–
1. Click each function menu to expand and display detailed  
•
:
functions.  
Pencil: Sharp borderline  
Air brush: Spray in a specific pattern.  
Brush: Smooth borderline  
Paint can: Paint a selected area with the same color.  
Rectangle: Make a rectangle and paint it.  
2. Click the Apply button to apply what was entered and  
modified. Click the Cancel button to cancel what was  
entered.  
PC Studio Media Manager  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
167  
–
–
–
–
Circle: Make a circle and paint it.  
Polygon: Make a polygon and paint it.  
Eraser: Make an object white.  
Move: Move the painted object (you cannot move the object after  
clicking the Apply button).  
Print Function  
1. Check a photo to print on Preview of the Print page.  
2. Select the Print button.  
Create Slide  
To use the draw feature:  
ᮣ
Select Menu  
➔
Create Slide.  
1. Select a draw tool, color and size, and then draw or edit  
View slide  
To view global slide:  
the object.  
2. Click the Apply button to apply the painting.  
To insert text:  
ᮣ
Select View slide from the Menu.  
You can view the slide in full screen in the sorting order.  
1. Click a desired location and enter text.  
To view group slide:  
2. Double-click the border to move the location and enter the  
ᮣ
Select View slide on the Group menu.  
text, and then click the Apply button.  
You can view the slide in full screen in the group sorting  
order.  
To insert sticker:  
1. Select a sticker and click a location on the photo to apply  
To view basket slide:  
it.  
ᮣ
Select View slide in the Function toolbar area.  
2. Click the sticker border to move the location and change  
You can view the slide in full screen in the given sorting  
order.  
the size, and then click the Apply button.  
To insert frame:  
ᮣ
Select a desired frame and click the Apply button.  
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Renaming an Album  
Album  
Making an Album  
1. Select an album, then right-click and select Rename  
album  
.
1. Click Album on the top menu.  
2. Enter a new name and press Enter  
.
2. Click Add on the submenu.  
– or –  
Storing an Album  
Move the cursor onto the submenu, then right-click and  
1. Select an album, then right-click and select Store album.  
click Make album from the menu.  
2. When My Computer opens, create a new folder or select an  
existing folder to store the files.  
3. When the input window appears on the submenu, enter an  
album name of your choice and click OK  
.
3. Click the Store button.  
Making a Quick Album  
Adding an Item to an Album  
1. Select an album, then right-click and select Make quick  
album  
1. Select an item to add to the album from the list.  
.
Several items can be selected.  
2. When the “Make quick album” window opens, enter an  
2. Right-click and select Add to album.  
album name and select attributes of the album.  
3. Select a desired album.  
3. Click OK  
.
4. If there are no albums created, you can click New album  
from the menu to make a new album and add the selected  
item automatically.  
Deleting an Album  
1. Select an album, then right-click and select Delete album  
.
2. Click OK  
.
PC Studio Media Manager  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
169  
Time  
Managing Files by Group  
ᮣ
Click the Group menu on the right side of a group name to  
display the Group menu.  
The Time menu sorts and lists files by date automatically based  
on their creation times. Users are not allowed to specify, delete,  
copy or move the Time menu.  
Renaming Batch Files  
Keyword  
1. Click Batch rename files on the Group menu.  
The Keyword menu lists files with a specific keyword.  
2. Enter a new name and click OK  
.
1. Move the cursor onto a file and right-click.  
Resizing Batch  
2. Click Edit Keyword.  
1. Click Batch resize on the Group menu.  
3. Use the Batch edit keywords menu of the Group menu to  
2. Select or enter a new size and click OK  
.
apply to all files in the group.  
Using the Keep source file option will maintain the source  
file while creating a resized file.  
A file with no keyword is classified as No information on  
the keyword submenu.  
Adding to Album  
Preference  
1. Click Add to album on the Group menu  
The Preference menu classifies and lists files based on scores  
set by users.  
2. Select a desired album from the album name list to add the  
files in the current album group to the album.  
1. Move the cursor onto a file and right-click.  
Batch Edit Keywords  
2. Click Change Preference from the menu to select a score.  
ᮣ
Click Batch edit keywords on the Group menu to display the  
A file is classified as No information when no score is selected  
or the file grade is deleted.  
keyword input pop-up window.  
170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entering a keyword into the pop-up window will apply it to all  
files in the group.  
Video Manager Application Structure  
Top Menu Button  
Batch Modify Preferences  
•
Menu: Includes the following: Refresh, Import File from PC, Import  
Folder from PC, Send to Device, Import Device File, Delete missing  
files, Edit, Play, Disc Burning, Add to Video converter, and Settings.  
All: Displays all files of the Viewer in the Contents area as thumbnails.  
Album: Consists of the Recently added menu, where you can view  
recently added files, and the user-created album menu.  
Time: Lists video files based on the creation time tags (date  
information). Users are not allowed to edit or delete the Time  
submenu.  
Select a desired score from the score list of Batch modify  
preferences on the Group menu to modify the scores of all items  
in the group.  
•
•
Video Manager  
Video Manager allows users to manage, store, share and play  
video files on PC and your Samsung mobile phone.  
•
•
•
ᮣ
To open the Video Manager, click  
Video.  
Keyword Groups video files based on keywords that users have given to  
:
the files. A file can have many keywords. In this case, several keyword  
menus are created and one file belongs to the keyword menus.  
Preference  
:
Users prioritize files that they prefer and the files are listed  
based on the scores.  
Converting a Video File  
Converts a file into a different extension while keeping its source  
video in Basket.  
1. Drag and drop a file you want to convert to Basket.  
2. Press the Convert button to start Video converter.  
PC Studio Media Manager  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
171  
   
Video files in the Basket are converted and saved in the  
NPS folder. The files are not overwritten and new files with  
the same names but different resolutions are created.  
•
•
File name search: Click the Search button after entering text.  
Time search: Click the calendar, select the dates and click the Search  
button.  
•
Keyword search: Click the Search button after entering text.  
You can specify a folder to save converted files to before  
converting. If you save converted files in the default folder, you  
can check them in the Recently added menu.  
ᮣ
To select search type, click  
Video, and  
then select Search from the menu bar.  
ᮣ
To go back to the previous screen, you need to  
click a desired menu or submenu after search.  
Video View Type  
Provides Preview, View details and View rotating slide functions  
for video files.  
Video Sort  
•
Preview: The number of files displayed on one screen differs  
depending on thumbnail size. The Viewer controller is located at the  
bottom-right corner. You can adjust thumbnail size to zoom in or zoom  
out thumbnails.  
Selects a sorting type of items displayed on the playlist.  
ᮣ
Select desired sorting criteria from File name, Time, and Size  
on the Sort dropdown list.  
•
•
View details: Double-click a file or select Play from the context menu  
to play it in full screen.  
ᮣ
To select sort type, click  
the menu bar.  
Video and then select Sort from  
View rotating slide: The screen rotates around the centre point to play  
the screen view in the foreground. Moving the mouse onto another  
thumbnail will move the desired screen to the foreground.  
Playing a Video File  
ᮣ
Play one selected file. You can select one file and then click  
Play to display the full-screen viewer.  
ᮣ
To select view type, click  
Video, and then  
select the view type from the menu bar.  
Playing Group Files  
Video Search  
1. Right-click a group name on the Album menu ➔ Submenu  
➔ user-created menu to display the Group context menu.  
You can search video files based on File name, Time, or Keyword.  
172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Click Play on the Group menu to play group files. The video  
3. Click Add Album on the left submenu.  
files are played in the order listed in the group.  
– or –  
Move the cursor onto the submenu, right-click and click  
Video Editor  
1. Click  
Make Album from the menu.  
Video.  
2. Move the cursor onto a file, right-click and select Edit from  
4. When the input window appears on the submenu, enter an  
the menu.  
– or –  
album name of your choice and press Enter.  
– or –  
Click Menu  
➔
Edit  
.
Move the cursor outside of the input window and click  
once.  
– or –  
Making a Quick Video Album  
Select Video Editor from the function toolbar.  
Automatically filters album names and adds music files to  
albums.  
3. Select the desired effects and subtitles, then select Save  
movie settings  
4. Select the file format, screen size, picture quality, and  
sound quality, and then click Apply  
.
You can add video files to the menu of a new album by scanning  
the video files and selecting specific attributes.  
.
1. Click  
Video.  
Album  
Making a Video Album  
2. Select an album to store from the Album submenu.  
3. Move the cursor onto the selected album, right-click and  
1. Click  
Video.  
click Make quick album from the menu.  
2. Click Album on the top menu.  
4. When the Make quick album window opens, enter an  
album name and use tags to select attributes of the album.  
PC Studio Media Manager  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
173  
 
5. Click OK  
.
1. Click  
Video.  
Deleting a Video Album  
2. Select an album, then right-click and select Store Album  
.
1. Click  
Video.  
3. When My Computer opens, make a new folder or select an  
existing folder to store the files.  
2. Select an album you want to delete on the submenu.  
4. Click OK  
.
3. Move the cursor onto the selected album, right-click and  
click Delete Album from the menu.  
Adding an Item to Video Album  
4. Click OK when the pop-up appears.  
1. Click  
Video.  
Renaming a Video Album  
2. Select an item, then right-click and select Add to album  
.
1. Click  
Video.  
3. Select a desired album.  
2. Select an album, then right-click and select Rename  
If there are no albums created, you can click New album to  
make a new album and add the selected item  
automatically.  
Album..  
3. When the selected album is changed into the input  
window, enter a new name and press Enter  
.
Video Time Menu  
– or –  
The Time menu sorts and lists files by date based on their  
creation time tags.  
Move the cursor outside of the input window and click  
once.  
ᮣ
Click  
Video, then select Time.  
Storing a Video Album  
Stores (or exports) album video files by title to a specified folder  
on PC.  
174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Keyword Menu  
Manage Files by Group  
ᮣ
Right-click a group name on the Album menu ➔ Submenu  
➔
The Keyword menu allows you to search video files with a  
specific keyword.  
user-created menu to display the Group context menu.  
1. Click  
Video.  
Batch Rename Files  
2. Move the cursor onto an item, right-click and select Edit  
1. Move the cursor onto a group name, right-click and click  
keyword. The Edit Keyword pop-up window opens.  
Batch Rename Files from the menu.  
When one video file has more than 2-3 keywords, more  
than 2-3 keyword menus are created on the keyword  
contents viewer screen and the files are displayed on the  
menus. Video files with no keyword in Video viewer are  
classified as No information on the keyword submenu.  
2. When the name input pop-up opens, enter a new name  
and click OK  
.
Adding to Album  
1. Move the cursor onto a group name, right-click and click  
Add to Album from the menu. Album names created by  
users are listed up in the Album menu.  
Preference Menu  
The Preference menu allows users to add scores to video files  
2. Select a desired album from the album name list to add the  
that they prefer and the files are listed based on the scores.  
files in the current album group to the album.  
You can sort items to your choice by setting preference.  
Editing a Keyword  
1. Click  
Video.  
For more information, refer to “Keyword Menu” on page 175.  
2. Move the cursor onto an item, right-click and click Change  
Note: Entering a keyword will apply it to all files in the group.  
preference from the menu.  
3. Select one from Score 5 to Score 1 (If you do not want to set  
preference, select None).  
PC Studio Media Manager  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
175  
•
Function icon area  
Slide Maker  
Slide Maker allows users to create slides from photos.  
–
Use the Fit to area button, the Fit to actual size button and the Zoom in/  
out slide bar to adjust photo size.  
Supported formats include: BMP, JPG (JPEG), GIF, PNG, WBMP,  
and TIF. Export file format is GIF.  
–
You can change slide size, slide background color and format  
information, and save or send the slide to a device.  
1. Click the Photo button on the function bar of PC Studio  
Adding a Slide  
1. Click the Slide Maker button on the function toolbar of PC  
Media Manager  
.
2. Click Menu Create slide  
➔
.
Studio Media Manager ➔ Photo  
.
Screen Description  
When starting Slide Maker, photos in the basket are  
displayed.  
•
Top area  
–
The application name, window function icon, menu and exit button are  
located here.  
When the slide is empty, Slide Maker is executed with its  
basket empty.  
•
Basket area  
–
Photos added to the basket in PC Studio Media Manager  
displayed here.  
Move left and right (scroll).  
➔
Photo are  
2. Click the Add Slide button in the basket area, select a  
group and photo files in the Import window, and then click  
–
–
–
–
–
–
Add or delete photos.  
OK.  
Slide settings are displayed here.  
Select slides and change their order.  
The maximum number of slides is 20.  
The number of usable pages differs depending on format.  
Note: You cannot drag and drop files from the Device window and My  
Computer. ASL files cannot be imported.  
Deleting a Slide  
•
Slide page area  
–
–
ᮣ
Select a photo and click Delete Slide to delete it from the  
The slide selected in the basket is displayed here.  
Adjust photo size and location.  
basket.  
176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Changing Slide Order  
Setting Changing Time  
ᮣ
Select a slide of which you want to change the order, and then  
drag and drop photos in the desired order to change the slide  
order.  
1. Click Time to set changing time.  
2. Click OK  
.
Settings  
Playing a Slide  
•
Slide size: Select a slide size within the specified range.  
Slide background color: Select a color that fills any possible space  
between the slide photo and the frame.  
1. Click Play slide. The slide is displayed in the pop-up  
window (displayed in the actual set size).  
•
•
Type:  
2. Click the [X] button to close the pop-up window during  
–
If Mobile phone slide is selected, the Send to device button appears.  
playback.  
Saving to the PC is not supported.  
–
GIF animation: A type to make moving GIF files.  
Adjusting Size  
Video Editor  
•
•
•
•
Fit to area: Display a photo fitted to the set area.  
Fit to actual size: Display a photo kept to its actual size.  
Zoom in/out: You can move the slide bar to change photo size.  
Video Editor allows you to import a file to edit to the basket and  
edit it with various functions from the function toolbar. You can  
also attach video files in series, apply video effects, adjust video  
length and use the sound text function.  
M
ove photo: You can drag and drop a photo to select what to display  
in the area.  
Setting Transition Effect  
Supported formats include: 3GP, AVI, MP4, MPG(MPEG),  
ASF, SKM, K3G, and WMV.  
ᮣ
Click the Transition effect button to set transition effect, and  
then click OK  
Video Screen Description  
Top area: The application name, window function icon, menu and exit  
.
•
button are located here.  
PC Studio Media Manager  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
177  
   
•
•
•
Effect area  
:
When clicking the Video Editor button in the Common area at the  
bottom of PC Studio Media Manager ➔ Video, the files in the  
basket are included in the clip.  
–
Select an effect to apply from the transition effect. Select an effect to  
apply from the theme effects.  
–
–
Adjust brightness, contrast and saturation in the image compensation.  
Apply subtitle and title.  
Importing Files  
1. In the Video editor screen, click Import file  
.
Play area  
:
2. Choose a category. The Import box pops up.  
–
–
–
–
Check what was edited.  
Contents area  
Import video, photo and music files.  
Provide the preview function of added contents.  
3. Select a file and click OK  
.
Apply Effects  
•
Transition effect: Choose from Barn, Blinds, Checkerboard, Fade,  
Edit area  
:
Gradient wipe, Insert, Iris, Pixelate, Radial wipe, Slide, Spiral, Stretch  
and Strips.  
–
Increase or decrease the timeline.  
–
Apply a contents file to the timeline.  
ᮣ
Select an effect and click Add to display its icon in the  
transition effect of the timeline.  
– or –  
•
•
Timeline area: Manage video files, transition effect, sound and  
subtitle timeline.  
Common area: The Settings, Save, Send to device and Burn CD icons  
are located here.  
ᮣ
You can drag and drop an effect to the timeline.  
Using Video Editor  
•
Theme effect: Old, Music video, Sepia, Green, Blur, Noise, Sharpen,  
Gray and Red effects are available.  
1. Click Video  
2. Select Menu  
➔
Edit  
.
1. Select an effect and click Apply to apply it to the selected  
clip of the timeline.  
When starting Video Editor, a selected file is included in the Video  
Editor clip.  
2. Click the Reset button to cancel the theme effect applied to  
the selected clip of the timeline.  
178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
•
Image adjustment: Adjust brightness, contrast and saturation  
Move the slide bar left or right and click Add. Click Reset to  
move the slide bar to 0.  
Undo cancels the last operation and moves back to the previous  
one while Redo cancels the last Undo operation.  
ᮣ
If there is a file for each content in the timeline, a new file is  
added to the last content in the timeline.  
•
Subtitle: Add a subtitle to the file. Select font, font size, color and  
location.  
Using Video 1 and Video 2 Options  
1. Drag and drop files to Video 1 and Video 2.  
ᮣ
Enter a text in the text input window and click Add.  
2. Select a desired transition effect and setting, and add the  
files to the timeline. You can adjust time by moving both  
ends of the video border left or right.  
•
Title: Enter a text in the text input window and click Apply. Add an  
Opening Text at the front of the timeline or an Ending Text at the end of  
the timeline.  
Video Contents Area  
Increasing or Decreasing the Timeline  
•
Select file tab: View all imported files: Imported photo, video and  
music files are displayed.  
Use the [+] and [-] buttons to increase or decrease the timeline.  
Adjusting Clip Length  
•
•
•
List of imported media display area: The files are listed in each tab.  
Preview: Display contents in the preview area.  
Buttons for preview: The Play, Stop, Previous and Next buttons are  
available.  
ᮣ
Click the front or end of the clip, and move your mouse to  
adjust the clip length.  
Copying, Moving, and Deleting  
Video Timeline  
•
Copy: Select a clip to copy. Press [Ctrl]+C to copy the clip and [Ctrl]+V  
to paste it.  
The Timeline feature makes it easier to edit videos.  
–
If you click a specific file in the timeline and activate it, the copied file is  
pasted to the end of the selected file.  
If you do not specify a file, the copied file is pasted to the end of the  
timeline.  
Adding a File to the Timeline  
1. Select a file to add from the contents.  
–
2. Drag and drop the file to the timeline area.  
•
Move: Select a clip, and drag and drop it to a desired location.  
PC Studio Media Manager  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
•
Delete: Select a clip to delete. Press Delete on the keyboard to delete  
it.  
Music Player  
Music Player supports various music files formats, including  
music files and recorded sound files supported by Samsung  
mobile phones.  
Saving Video  
1. Click Save at the bottom.  
•
Menu Button: Displays Open, Player settings, Help and Version  
information.  
2. Select a location and format. (A file is saved based on the  
preset options.)  
•
Music Information Window: Displays the title, artist, album, and  
rating of the music file being played.  
Exporting to Device  
ᮣ
Click Send to Device at the bottom  
If you click the Music information window, the window is  
zoomed in, and detailed information (album information,  
file information) is displayed.  
The Device window opens and the file is sent.  
CD Burning  
The album whose music is being played can be  
immediately set up by dragging the image file onto the  
player.  
ᮣ
Click Burn CD at the bottom. The file is added to the disk  
burning program list.  
For more information, refer to “Disc Burning Settings” on  
page 190.  
•
•
•
Repetition Settings: Selects a repetition play format. Choose from No  
repetition, Repeat entire track, Repeat selected track.  
Shuffle Settings: Plays tracks in the playlist at random and sets  
Shuffle type. Choose Shuffle or No shuffle.  
Set File Information  
1. Click File Information at the bottom.  
2. Select file format, screen size, video quality and audio  
Play Status: Displays the current Play status (Current playtime/Total  
playtime) on the Play button.  
quality in the Video Settings pop-up window.  
You can search music by dragging a mouse on the circle  
while holding down the left mouse button.  
180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
•
•
•
•
•
Previous Button: Plays the previous item on Playlist.  
Play/Pause Button: Plays or pauses music.  
Stop Button: Stops play.  
Next Button: Plays the next item on Playlist.  
Volume Control Bar: Control the volume by dragging the mouse on  
the circle while holding down the left mouse button.  
Open/Close Playlist Button: Opens or closes the Music playlist  
window.  
The file item opened via Open File is added to the My  
Album folder of Playlist.  
Music Playlist  
Music Playlist allows you to control track playlists played by the  
Music Player.  
1. Click Toolbox  
.
•
2. Click Music Player  
.
Selecting a Music File  
3. Click the Playlist button.  
Supported formats include: *.MP3, *.WMA, *.ASF (Sound Only),  
*.3GP(Sound Only), *.WAV, *.AMR, *.AAC, *.M4A, *.MMF, *.MID,  
*.MIDI, *.PMD, and *.MP4 (Sound Only).  
Selecting an Album  
1. Click the View Album list button located between the album  
name (default setting: My album) and the playlist.  
1. Click Toolbox  
.
The album list is zoomed in. If you click it in the zoomed-in  
state, it will zoom out.  
2. Click Music Player  
3. Click Menu or right-click in the title area at the top of the  
application.  
2. Click the album folder.  
4. Click Open File  
.
The playlist of the selected album folder is displayed in the  
list window, and the album name is displayed in the title  
area.  
5. Select a file from the file list and then click OK  
.
– or –  
Drag and drop the file onto Player.  
PC Studio Media Manager  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
181  
 
3. To close the album list, click the Zoom out button on the  
playlist. The album name currently selected will be shown  
and the rest of the field will be hidden.  
Automatic Item Collection  
1. Click the Automatic item collection button on the bottom  
left of Playlist application.  
2. Click the drive location where you want to search for music  
Adding New Album Folder  
files.  
1. Open the menu by right-clicking in the album list.  
2. Click Add New Album.  
Note: If you click the Stop button during automatic search, only music files  
searched up to that point in time are added to Playlist.  
Deleting a Selected Album  
Adding an Item  
1. Click the Add Item button.  
Note: The basic folder provided (My album) and the disc drive are not  
removable.  
2. Select a file to add from the file list and then click OK.  
1. Select the album folder and right-click to open the menu.  
2. Click Delete selected album.  
Tip: You can also drag and drop the file onto Playlist.  
Renaming an Album  
Deleting an Item  
Note: The names of the basic folder provided (My album) and the disc drive  
1. Click and select an item to delete from Playlist.  
cannot be renamed.  
Note: You can delete an item even while it is playing.  
1. Select the album folder and right-click to open the menu.  
2. Click Rename.  
2. Click the Delete item button.  
The name input box of the selected album is activated.  
3. Enter the name and press the Enter key.  
182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying an Item  
•
•
Menu button: Provides functions for Opening Files, Subtitle, Audio,  
Player Settings, Help, and Version Information.  
Display File name. File type, File size: Displays the title, file type, and  
file size of the video being played.  
You can copy Playlist items to other album folders on your  
Samsung phone.  
ᮣ
Hold down the left mouse button after clicking the item to  
copy, then drag and drop the item to the appropriate album  
folder or device.  
•
•
Play Screen: Shows the video being played.  
Play Status: Displays the current Play status (Current playtime/Total  
playtime).  
Arranging a List  
Note: You can search for a video by dragging left and right while holding the  
Playlist items are arranged by default in the order they are added  
to the list. To change the sorting method:  
left mouse button down. (Playtime is displayedon the screen.)  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Previous Button: Plays the previous item on Playlist.  
Play/Pause Button: Plays or pauses a video.  
Stop Button: Stops play.  
Next Button: Plays the next item on Playlist.  
Mute Button: Mutes or reactivates the sound.  
Volume Control Bar: Controls volume by dragging left and right while  
holding down the left mouse button.  
1. Select Menu ➔ Arrange list.  
2. Select one of the following sorting methods: File name,  
Title, Artist, Play time, File size, Issue date, Rating).  
3. After arrangement, you can change the order of items by  
dragging them.  
Video Player  
•
Video Playlist Open/Close Button: Opens or closes the Video playlist  
window.  
Video Player allows you to play videos taken by your mobile  
phone. It works with a variety of PC video formats. Supported  
formats include: 3GP, AVI, MP4, MPG(MPEG), ASF, SKM,  
K3G, and WMV.  
Opening a Video File  
Supported formats include: 3GP, AVI, MP4, MPG(MPEG),  
ASF, SKM, K3G, and WMV.  
1. Click Toolbox  
.
2. Click Video Player  
.
PC Studio Media Manager  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
1. Click Menu or right-click in the title area at the top of the  
Full Screen  
application.  
1. Right-click in the area of Play screen.  
2. Click Open file.  
2. When the menu appears, click Full screen.  
3. Select a file from the file list and then click OK.  
– or –  
In Full screen play, the control bar appears only when the  
mouse pointer is located at the top or bottom of the  
screen.  
Drag and drop the file onto Player.  
3. To return to the previous screen size, press the ESC key or  
Setting Subtitles for a Video  
1. Click Menu or right-click in the title area at the top of the  
application.  
click the General mode button on the top right.  
Player Settings  
2. Click Subtitles  
ᮣ
Click Player setting from the menu:  
•
Fit to window and screen size/Fix screen size: Allows you to set  
viewing preferences.  
The subtitles menus open.  
•
Display subtitles: If you search for subtitles files and select one, the  
selected file is applied to the current video.  
•
Consecutive play: Allows you to play a Playlist item consecutively.  
Video Playlist  
•
•
•
Subtitle sync +0.5: Sets the subtitles to display 0.5 seconds later.  
Subtitle sync -0.5: Sets the subtitles to display 0.5 seconds earlier.  
Decrease subtitles: Takes the size of the subtitles display down a  
step.  
Video Playlist allows you to control Playlist played by Video  
Player.  
Adding an Item  
•
•
Increase subtitles: Takes the size of the subtitles display up a step.  
Hide/View subtitles: View or Hide subtitles.  
Supported formats include: 3GP, AVI, MP4, MPG(MPEG),  
ASF, SKM, K3G, and WMV.  
1. Click the Add item button from the bottom of Playlist.  
184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Select a file to add from the file list and then click OK.  
– or –  
•
File information display window: Allows you to check the current  
image size, file capacity, and last modified date (time). During size  
adjustment, size information is displayed using the percent sign (%).  
Previous Button: Opens the image before the current image.  
Next button: Opens the image after the current image.  
Left/Right rotate button: Rotates the image 90 degrees.  
Fit to window size button: Adjusts the image size to the window size.  
Zoom out button: Decreases the image size in one-step decrements  
for up to 15 settings: (5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 50, 70, 100, 150, 200, 300,  
500, 700, 1000, 1500%).  
Drag and drop the file onto [Playlist].  
•
•
•
•
•
Deleting an Item  
1. Select an item to delete.  
Note: You can delete an item even while it is playing.  
2. Click the Delete item button.  
•
Zoom in button: Increases the image size in one-step increments for  
up to 15 settings (5, 10, 15, 20, 30. 50, 70. 100, 150, 200, 300, 500,  
700, 1000, 1500%).  
Image Viewer  
The Image Viewer enables you to view photos taken by your  
mobile phone, as well as various types of PC images. Supported  
formats include: BMP, JPG (JPEG), GIF, PNG, and WBMP.  
Opening a File in Image Viewer  
Supported formats include: *.BMP, *.JPG, *.JPEG, *.GIF, *.PNG,  
and *.WBMP.  
1. Click Toolbox  
.
2. Click Image Viewer  
.
1. Click Menu or right-click in the title area at the top of the  
•
•
Menu button: Provides functions for Opening Files, Help, and Version  
Information.  
application.  
2. Click Open File.  
Display File: Displays the title and file type of the image being seen  
and shows the number of images in the appropriate location folder and  
the order of the current image.  
3. Select a file from the file list and then click OK.  
– or –  
•
Image window: Shows the selected image.  
Drag and drop the file onto Viewer.  
PC Studio Media Manager  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
185  
   
Full Screen Mode  
2. Select a video file from the Open window and click Open.  
1. Right-click in the image area.  
3. Click Delete items at the bottom to delete the added file.  
2. When Menu appears, click Full screen.  
4. Click the Preset selection box and then the desired presets  
from the Preset list.  
Tip: In Full screen viewing, the control bar appears only when the mouse  
pointer is located at the top or bottom of the screen.  
5. Click Select a location to save to and specify a location to  
which to save the file.  
3. To return to the previous screen size, press the ESC key or  
6. Click the Convert button at the bottom to begin converting  
click the General mode button on the top right.  
all the files in the list.  
Video Converter  
The Video Converter allows you to convert the format of video  
files for transfer from your mobile phone and optimizes the  
playback environment.  
7. Select Turn off the PC when finished in the Conversion  
progress window to shut down the system after conversion  
is complete.  
1. Click Toolbox  
.
Note: All unsaved information from applications other than New PC Studio  
may be lost when the system shuts down. Make sure that work in  
progress in all other applications is saved and closed before  
proceeding.  
2. Click Video Converter  
.
Converting a Video  
1. Select a video file from My Computer or a Connected  
8. Click the Close button after conversion is complete and  
device explorer, then drag and drop the item to the File list  
return to the main screen.  
area.  
Items successfully converted are displayed in green. Failed  
items are displayed in red.  
– or –  
Click Add items at the bottom or click Menu  
➔
Open file.  
186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Editing Presets  
Supported formats include: 3GP, AVI, MP4, MPG(MPEG),  
ASF, SKM, K3G, and WMV. Conversion-supported formats  
include: MP4, K3G, and SKM.  
1. Select an item from the Manage presets window and click  
the Edit button.  
Subtitle Settings  
2. When the Edit presets window appears, change the screen  
size, image settings, sound settings, and subtitle size as  
needed and click OK to confirm the changes.  
1. Click the selection box next to the file name from the file  
list to toggle subtitles and select the desired subtitles  
setting.  
The screen size and subtitle size ratios applied can be  
previewed in the Preview area at the top.  
•
O: Include subtitles when converting. (Set automatically if there is  
a subtitles file with the same name as the video file in the  
corresponding folder.)  
3. For default presets, click the Make default button to  
•
X
: Do not include subtitles when converting. (Set automatically if  
restore the initial presets.  
there are no subtitles files with the same name as the video file in  
the corresponding folder.)  
Deleting Presets  
• Find: Manually specify a subtitles file to use if there are no subtitles  
or if different subtitles are required.  
1. Select an item from the Manage presets window and click  
Delete.  
Managing Presets  
2. Click the Yes button from the Delete popup window to  
Edit the default presets or the presets that are created  
automatically when connecting a device. You can also customize  
your own presets.  
confirm deletion.  
Note: Default presets cannot be deleted.  
Opening the Manage Presets Window  
1. Click the menu at the top and select Manage presets.  
Adding Presets  
2. Select and manage presets from the current presets  
1. Click Add.  
displayed in the Manage presets window.  
PC Studio Media Manager  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
187  
2. Enter the preset name and set the screen size, video  
settings, sound settings and subtitle size as needed and  
then click OK.  
The corresponding drive list is displayed.  
Selecting a Save Format  
You can select the file type and sound quality of the sound source  
to be extracted. Supported formats include: *.MP3, *.AAC, *.M4A,  
and *.WAV.  
3. The newly added settings can be confirmed from the  
Preset selection box in the main screen.  
1. Expand the selection box and select a file format to save.  
Note: A maximum of 20 user presets can be added.  
2. Select the sound quality supported by the file format.  
•
High quality sound provides clean sound quality, but song capacity  
is reduced.  
Disk Ripping  
Disk Ripping is the process of copying audio or video content to a  
hard disk.  
•
Low quality sound allows for more pieces of music to be saved.  
Modifying Album Information  
1. Click Toolbox  
.
You can check and modify the property value of the sound source  
to be extracted.  
2. Click Disk Ripping  
.
3. Insert a music CD into the CD drive.  
ᮣ
Click Menu ➔ Modify album information.  
If there is only one drive, the CD is automatically  
recognized and the list is displayed.  
Users can directly input, modify, and save to all of the items.  
Disc Ripping Settings  
If there are two or more drives, click the drive selection  
box.  
You can change detailed settings for extracting sound from discs.  
1. Select Menu ➔ Ripping settings.  
4. Check the CD title in the expanded selection box.  
2. Set up each of the following items:  
• Save location settings: Directly input the location in which the  
extracted file is to be saved or select a folder bypressing the Find  
5. Click the drive containing the CD to be extracted.  
188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
path button on the right side of the input box. Default settings  
location is C:\Documents and Settings\User name\Documents\My  
music.  
2. Click the drive containing the CD to extract.  
3. Select and click an item to extract.  
4. Click Rip selected items.  
• File name rule: Select properties to form the name of the extracted  
file. (Artist/Album/Track No./Music title/Genre/Bit transmissionrate)  
You can check the setup rules in the Preview window.  
The sound source extraction process window is the same  
as that for Rip all items.  
• Eject disc after ripping completion: Click on this to automatically  
eject the CD after the ripping completion.  
Extracted items are shown in grey in the list, and are  
Ripping a CD  
excluded from the extraction list when using Rip all items.  
You can extract all items on a CD or extract selected items.  
Disk Burning  
Ripping All Items  
Disc burning enables you to burn audio and data files to discs.  
1. Insert a music CD into the CD drive.  
1. Click Toolbox  
.
2. Click the drive containing the CD to be extracted.  
3. Click the Rip all items button.  
2. Click Disk Burning  
.
Selecting Burning Format  
The sound source extraction process window is displayed.  
You can select Audio disc burning or Data disc burning.  
Click the Data burning format selection box.  
ᮣ
Note: If you click the Stop button during the extraction process, only the  
sound sources extracted up to that point in time will be saved.  
•
•
The default setting is Data.  
The list arrangement method is changed according to the burning  
format.  
4. If it is completed or stops, you can check the status of the  
extraction process by clicking the View log button.  
Ripping Selected Items  
1. Insert a music CD into the CD drive.  
PC Studio Media Manager  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
189  
   
Selecting a Drive  
Deleting an Item from the Burn List  
1. Select an item to delete.  
If there is no burner, “No burner connected” is displayed. If a  
burner is connected or newly connected, it is automatically  
displayed.  
2. Click the Delete item button.  
The item selected from the list is deleted.  
1. If there are two or more burner drives, click the drive  
Disc Burning Settings  
selection box.  
1. Click Menu ➔ Burning settings.  
2. Click the drive for burning.  
2. Set up each of the following items:  
The corresponding drive list is displayed.  
• Burning speed: Select burning speed.  
Naming a Disc  
If there is no empty disc in the selected drive, “No disc” is  
Note: Burning is relatively stable if slow speed is used.  
displayed.  
• Eject disc after burning: Click on this to automatically eject the CD  
If an empty disc is inserted, “No name” is displayed.  
after burning.  
ᮣ
Click the input box and enter the name.  
• Save list: The list previously formed is maintained even if the  
application restarts.  
Adding an Item to the Burn List  
1. Click the Add item button.  
Burning a Disc  
2. Select a file to add from the file list and then click OK.  
– or –  
Note: The button is activated only when an empty disc is inserted and there  
is at least one item in the burning list.  
Drag and drop the file onto Disc burning.  
1. Click the Burn button.  
2. If it is completed or stops, you can check the progress by  
The selected file is added to the burning list.  
clicking the View log button.  
190  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 19: Accessibility  
TTY Settings  
TTY (also known as a TDD or Text Telephone) is a  
telecommunications device that allows people who are deaf or  
hard of hearing, or who have speech or language disabilities, to  
communicate via a telephone. This phone comes TTY-ready and  
only requires the insertion of the TTY device to enable this  
feature.  
Use the following steps to access the TTY settings:  
ᮣ
Inserting a TTY connector into the Headset/Adapter jack (on  
the left side of the phone) enables this function.  
For additional technical support you may access the following  
website or call 1-888-987-4357.  
http://www.samsungtelecom.com/contact_us/accessibility.asp  
Accessibility  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Section 20: Health and Safety Information  
This section outlines the safety precautions associated with using  
your phone. These safety precautions should be followed to  
safely use your phone.  
absorption of RF energy by the human body expressed in units of  
watts per kilogram (W/kg). The FCC requires wireless phones to  
comply with a safety limit of 1.6 watts per kilogram (1.6 W/kg).  
Health and Safety Information  
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) Signals  
Certification Information (SAR)  
The FCC exposure limit incorporates a substantial margin of  
safety to give additional protection to the public and to account  
for any variations in measurements.  
SAR tests are conducted using standard operating positions  
accepted by the FCC with the phone transmitting at its highest  
certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the  
SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual  
SAR level of the phone while operating can be well below the  
maximum value. This is because the phone is designed to  
operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power  
required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a  
wireless base station antenna, the lower the power output.  
Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is  
designed and manufactured not to exceed the exposure limits for  
radio frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications  
Commission (FCC) of the U.S. government.  
These FCC exposure limits are derived from the  
recommendations of two expert organizations, the National  
Counsel on Radiation Protection and Measurement (NCRP) and  
the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE).  
In both cases, the recommendations were developed by scientific  
and engineering experts drawn from industry, government, and  
academia after extensive reviews of the scientific literature  
related to the biological effects of RF energy.  
Before a new model phone is available for sale to the public, it  
must be tested and certified to the FCC that it does not exceed  
the exposure limit established by the FCC. Tests for each model  
phone are performed in positions and locations (e.g. at the ear  
and worn on the body) as required by the FCC.  
The exposure limit set by the FCC for wireless mobile phones  
employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific  
Absorption Rate (SAR). The SAR is a measure of the rate of  
For body worn operation, this phone has been tested and meets  
FCC RF exposure guidelines when used with an accessory that  
192  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
contains no metal and that positions the handset a minimum of  
1.5 cm from the body.  
pertains to a particular model phone, this site uses the phone  
FCC ID number which is usually printed somewhere on the case  
of the phone.  
Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with FCC RF  
exposure guidelines.  
Sometimes it may be necessary to remove the battery pack to  
find the number. Once you have the FCC ID number for a  
particular phone, follow the instructions on the website and it  
should provide values for typical or maximum SAR for a particular  
phone. Additional product specific SAR information can also be  
obtained at www.fcc.gov/cgb/sar.  
The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for this mobile  
phone with all reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance  
with the FCC RF exposure guidelines. The maximum SAR values  
for this model phone as reported to the FCC are:  
GSM 850  
:
Please Note the Following Information When  
Using Your Handset  
1. WARNING REGARDING DISPLAY  
•
•
Head: 0.277 W/Kg.  
Body-worn: 0.916 W/Kg.  
GSM 1900  
:
The display on your handset is made of glass or acrylic and  
could break if your handset is dropped or if it receives  
significant impact. Do not use if screen is broken or  
cracked as this could cause injury to you.  
•
•
Head: 0.147 W/Kg.  
Body-worn: 0.547 W/Kg.  
WCDMA 850  
•
•
:
Head: 0.195 W/Kg.  
Body-worn: 0.384 W/Kg.  
2. WARRANTY DISCLAIMER: PROPER USE OF A TOUCH SCREEN  
HANDSET  
WCDMA 1900  
:
•
•
Head: 0.349 W/Kg.  
Body-worn: 0.833 W/Kg.  
If your handset has a touch-screen display, please note  
that a touch-screen responds best to a light touch from the  
pad of your finger or a non-metallic stylus. Using excessive  
force or a metallic object when pressing on the touch-  
SAR information on this and other model phones can be viewed  
online at http://www.fcc.gov/oet/ea. To find information that  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
193  
 
screen may damage the tempered glass surface and void  
the warranty. For more information, refer to “Standard  
Limited Warranty” on page 212.  
CONFIGURATION FOR THE POWER OUTLET. THIS POWER UNIT IS  
INTENDED TO BE CORRECTLY ORIENTATED IN A VERTICAL OR  
HORIZONTAL OR FLOOR MOUNT POSITION.  
Consumer Information on Wireless Phones  
Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling  
Samsung cares for the environment and encourages its  
customers to recycle Samsung mobile phones and genuine  
Samsung accessories.  
The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has published a  
series of Questions and Answers for consumers relating to radio  
frequency (RF) exposure from wireless phones. The FDA  
publication includes the following information:  
Go to: https://fun.samsungmobileusa.com/recycling/index.jsp or call  
1-800-822-8837 for more information.  
What kinds of phones are the subject of this update?  
The term wireless phone refers here to hand-held wireless  
phones with built-in antennas, often called "cell," "mobile," or  
"PCS" phones. These types of wireless phones can expose the  
user to measurable radio frequency energy (RF) because of the  
short distance between the phone and the user's head. These RF  
exposures are limited by Federal Communications Commission  
safety guidelines that were developed with the advice of FDA and  
other federal health and safety agencies.  
UL Certified Travel Adapter  
The Travel Adapter for this phone has met applicable UL safety  
requirements. Please adhere to the following safety instructions  
per UL guidelines.  
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS OUTLINED MAY LEAD  
TO SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY AND POSSIBLE PROPERTY  
DAMAGE.  
When the phone is located at greater distances from the user, the  
exposure to RF is drastically lower because a person's RF  
exposure decreases rapidly with increasing distance from the  
source. The so-called "cordless phones," which have a base unit  
connected to the telephone wiring in a house, typically operate at  
far lower power levels, and thus produce RF exposures well  
within the FCC's compliance limits.  
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS - SAVE THESE  
INSTRUCTIONS.  
DANGER - TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,  
CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS.  
FOR CONNECTION TO A SUPPLY NOT IN NORTH AMERICA, USE  
AN ATTACHMENT PLUG ADAPTOR OF THE PROPER  
194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Do wireless phones pose a health hazard?  
health hazard and to repair, replace or recall the phones so that  
the hazard no longer exists.  
The available scientific evidence does not show that any health  
problems are associated with using wireless phones. There is no  
proof, however, that wireless phones are absolutely safe.  
Wireless phones emit low levels of radio frequency energy (RF) in  
the microwave range while being used. They also emit very low  
levels of RF when in the stand-by mode. Whereas high levels of  
RF can produce health effects (by heating tissue), exposure to  
low level RF that does not produce heating effects causes no  
known adverse health effects. Many studies of low level RF  
exposures have not found any biological effects. Some studies  
have suggested that some biological effects may occur, but such  
findings have not been confirmed by additional research. In some  
cases, other researchers have had difficulty in reproducing those  
studies, or in determining the reasons for inconsistent results.  
Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA regulatory  
actions, FDA has urged the wireless phone industry to take a  
number of steps, including the following:  
•
•
•
Support needed research into possible biological effects of RF of the  
type emitted by wireless phones;  
Design wireless phones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure to  
the user that is not necessary for device function; and  
Cooperate in providing users of wireless phones with the best possible  
information on possible effects of wireless phone use on human  
health.  
FDA belongs to an interagency working group of the federal  
agencies that have responsibility for different aspects of RF  
safety to ensure coordinated efforts at the federal level. The  
following agencies belong to this working group:  
What is FDA's role concerning the safety of wireless  
phones?  
•
•
•
•
•
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health  
Environmental Protection Agency  
Under the law, FDA does not review the safety of radiation-  
emitting consumer products such as wireless phones before they  
can be sold, as it does with new drugs or medical devices.  
However, the agency has authority to take action if wireless  
phones are shown to emit radio frequency energy (RF) at a level  
that is hazardous to the user. In such a case, FDA could require  
the manufacturers of wireless phones to notify users of the  
Federal Communications Commission  
Occupational Safety and Health Administration  
National Telecommunications and Information Administration  
The National Institutes of Health participates in some interagency  
working group activities, as well.  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
195  
FDA shares regulatory responsibilities for wireless phones with  
the Federal Communications Commission (FCC). All phones that  
are sold in the United States must comply with FCC safety  
guidelines that limit RF exposure. FCC relies on FDA and other  
health agencies for safety questions about wireless phones.  
cancer-causing chemicals so as to be pre-disposed to develop  
cancer in absence of RF exposure. Other studies exposed the  
animals to RF for up to 22 hours per day. These conditions are  
not similar to the conditions under which people use wireless  
phones, so we don't know with certainty what the results of such  
studies mean for human health.  
FCC also regulates the base stations that the wireless phone  
networks rely upon. While these base stations operate at higher  
power than do the wireless phones themselves, the RF  
exposures that people get from these base stations are typically  
thousands of times lower than those they can get from wireless  
phones.  
Three large epidemiology studies have been published since  
December 2000. Between them, the studies investigated any  
possible association between the use of wireless phones and  
primary brain cancer, glioma, meningioma, or acoustic neuroma,  
tumors of the brain or salivary gland, leukemia, or other cancers.  
None of the studies demonstrated the existence of any harmful  
health effects from wireless phones RF exposures.  
Base stations are thus not the primary subject of the safety  
questions discussed in this document.  
However, none of the studies can answer questions about long-  
term exposures, since the average period of phone use in these  
studies was around three years.  
What are the results of the research done already?  
The research done thus far has produced conflicting results, and  
many studies have suffered from flaws in their research  
methods. Animal experiments investigating the effects of radio  
frequency energy (RF) exposures characteristic of wireless  
phones have yielded conflicting results that often cannot be  
repeated in other laboratories. A few animal studies, however,  
have suggested that low levels of RF could accelerate the  
development of cancer in laboratory animals. However, many of  
the studies that showed increased tumor development used  
animals that had been genetically engineered or treated with  
What research is needed to decide whether RF exposure  
from wireless phones poses a health risk?  
A combination of laboratory studies and epidemiological studies  
of people actually using wireless phones would provide some of  
the data that are needed. Lifetime animal exposure studies could  
be completed in a few years. However, very large numbers of  
animals would be needed to provide reliable proof of a cancer  
promoting effect if one exists. Epidemiological studies can  
196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
provide data that is directly applicable to human populations, but  
ten or more years' follow-up may be needed to provide answers  
about some health effects, such as cancer.  
FDA and Cellular Telecommunications & Internet Association  
(CTIA) have a formal Cooperative Research and Development  
Agreement (CRADA) to do research on wireless phone safety.  
FDA provides the scientific oversight, obtaining input from  
experts in government, industry, and academic organizations.  
This is because the interval between the time of exposure to a  
cancer-causing agent and the time tumors develop - if they do -  
may be many, many years. The interpretation of epidemiological  
studies is hampered by difficulties in measuring actual RF  
exposure during day-to-day use of wireless phones. Many  
factors affect this measurement, such as the angle at which the  
phone is held, or which model of phone is used.  
CTIA-funded research is conducted through contracts to  
independent investigators. The initial research will include both  
laboratory studies and studies of wireless phone users. The  
CRADA will also include a broad assessment of additional  
research needs in the context of the latest research  
developments around the world.  
What is FDA doing to find out more about the possible  
health effects of wireless phone RF?  
What steps can I take to reduce my exposure to radio  
frequency energy from my wireless phone?  
FDA is working with the U.S. National Toxicology Program and  
with groups of investigators around the world to ensure that high  
priority animal studies are conducted to address important  
questions about the effects of exposure to radio frequency  
energy (RF).  
If there is a risk from these products - and at this point we do not  
know that there is - it is probably very small. But if you are  
concerned about avoiding even potential risks, you can take a  
few simple steps to minimize your exposure to radio frequency  
energy (RF). Since time is a key factor in how much exposure a  
person receives, reducing the amount of time spent using a  
wireless phone will reduce RF exposure.  
FDA has been a leading participant in the World Health  
Organization international Electromagnetic Fields (EMF) Project  
since its inception in 1996. An influential result of this work has  
been the development of a detailed agenda of research needs  
that has driven the establishment of new research programs  
around the world. The Project has also helped develop a series of  
public information documents on EMF issues.  
•
If you must conduct extended conversations by wireless phone every  
day, you could place more distance between your body and the source  
of the RF, since the exposure level drops off dramatically with distance.  
For example, you could use a headset and carry the wireless phone  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
197  
away from your body or use a wireless phone connected to a remote  
antenna.  
was not based on scientific evidence that any health hazard  
exists.  
Again, the scientific data do not demonstrate that wireless  
phones are harmful. But if you are concerned about the RF  
exposure from these products, you can use measures like those  
described above to reduce your RF exposure from wireless phone  
use.  
Do hands-free kits for wireless phones reduce  
risks from exposure to RF emissions?  
Since there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions  
from wireless phones, there is no reason to believe that hands-  
free kits reduce risks. Hands-free kits can be used with wireless  
phones for convenience and comfort. These systems reduce the  
absorption of RF energy in the head because the phone, which is  
the source of the RF emissions, will not be placed against the  
head. On the other hand, if the phone is mounted against the  
waist or other part of the body during use, then that part of the  
body will absorb more RF energy. Wireless phones marketed in  
the U.S. are required to meet safety requirements regardless of  
whether they are used against the head or against the body.  
Either configuration should result in compliance with the safety  
limit.  
What about children using wireless phones?  
The scientific evidence does not show a danger to users of  
wireless phones, including children and teenagers. If you want to  
take steps to lower exposure to radio frequency energy (RF), the  
measures described above would apply to children and  
teenagers using wireless phones. Reducing the time of wireless  
phone use and increasing the distance between the user and the  
RF source will reduce RF exposure.  
Some groups sponsored by other national governments have  
advised that children be discouraged from using wireless phones  
at all. For example, the government in the United Kingdom  
distributed leaflets containing such a recommendation in  
December 2000.  
Do wireless phone accessories that claim to shield  
the head from RF radiation work?  
Since there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions  
from wireless phones, there is no reason to believe that  
accessories that claim to shield the head from those emissions  
reduce risks. Some products that claim to shield the user from RF  
absorption use special phone cases, while others involve nothing  
They noted that no evidence exists that using a wireless phone  
causes brain tumors or other ill effects. Their recommendation to  
limit wireless phone use by children was strictly precautionary; it  
198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
more than a metallic accessory attached to the phone. Studies  
have shown that these products generally do not work as  
advertised. Unlike "hand-free" kits, these so-called "shields"  
may interfere with proper operation of the phone. The phone may  
be forced to boost its power to compensate, leading to an  
increase in RF absorption. In February 2002, the Federal trade  
Commission (FTC) charged two companies that sold devices that  
claimed to protect wireless phone users from radiation with  
making false and unsubstantiated claims.  
wireless phones and helped develop a voluntary standard  
sponsored by the Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers  
(IEEE). This standard specifies test methods and performance  
requirements for hearing aids and wireless phones so that no  
interference occurs when a person uses a compatible phone and  
a compatible hearing aid at the same time. This standard was  
approved by the IEEE in 2000.  
FDA continues to monitor the use of wireless phones for possible  
interactions with other medical devices. Should harmful  
interference be found to occur, FDA will conduct testing to assess  
the interference and work to resolve the problem.  
According to FTC, these defendants lacked a reasonable basis to  
substantiate their claim.  
What about wireless phone interference with  
medical equipment?  
Additional information on the safety of RF exposures from various  
sources can be obtained from the following organizations  
(Updated 1/1/2010):  
Radio frequency energy (RF) from wireless phones can interact  
with some electronic devices. For this reason, FDA helped  
develop a detailed test method to measure electromagnetic  
interference (EMI) of implanted cardiac pacemakers and  
defibrillators from wireless telephones. This test method is now  
part of a standard sponsored by the Association for the  
Advancement of Medical instrumentation (AAMI). The final draft,  
a joint effort by FDA, medical device manufacturers, and many  
other groups, was completed in late 2000. This standard will  
allow manufacturers to ensure that cardiac pacemakers and  
defibrillators are safe from wireless phone EMI. FDA has tested  
•
•
•
•
•
FCC RF Safety Program:  
http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/  
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA):  
http://www.epa.gov/radiation/  
Occupational Safety and Health Administration's (OSHA):  
http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/radiofrequencyradiation/index.html  
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH):  
http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/  
World Health Organization (WHO):  
http://www.who.int/peh-emf/  
Health and Safety Information  
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
•
•
•
International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection:  
http://www.icnirp.de  
3. Position your wireless phone within easy reach. Be able to  
access your wireless phone without removing your eyes  
from the road. If you get an incoming call at an  
Health Protection Agency:  
http://www.hpa.org.uk/radiation  
inconvenient time, let your voice mail answer it for you.  
US Food and Drug Administration:  
4. Let the person you are speaking with know you are driving;  
if necessary, suspend the call in heavy traffic or hazardous  
weather conditions. Rain, sleet, snow, ice and even heavy  
traffic can be hazardous.  
http://www.fda.gov/Radiation-EmittingProducts/  
RadiationEmittingProductsandProcedures/  
HomeBusinessandEntertainment/CellPhones/default.htm  
Road Safety  
Your wireless phone gives you the powerful ability to  
communicate by voice, almost anywhere, anytime. But an  
important responsibility accompanies the benefits of wireless  
phones, one that every user must uphold.  
5. Do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving.  
Jotting down a "to do" list or flipping through your address  
book takes attention away from your primary  
responsibility, driving safely.  
When driving a car, driving is your first responsibility. When using  
your wireless phone behind the wheel of a car, practice good  
common sense and remember the following tips:  
6. Dial sensibly and assess the traffic; if possible, place calls  
when you are not moving or before pulling into traffic. Try  
to plan calls when your car will be stationary. If you need to  
make a call while moving, dial only a few numbers, check  
the road and your mirrors, then continue.  
1. Get to know your wireless phone and its features, such as  
speed dial and redial. If available, these features help you  
to place your call without taking your attention off the road.  
2. When available, use a hands-free device. If possible, add  
an additional layer of convenience and safety to your  
wireless phone with one of the many hands free  
accessories available today.  
200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
7. Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations that  
may be distracting. Make people you are talking with  
aware you are driving and suspend conversations that  
have the potential to divert your attention from the road.  
"The wireless industry reminds you to use your phone safely when  
driving."  
For more information, please call 1-888-901-SAFE, or visit our  
web-site www.ctia.org  
.
8. Use your wireless phone to call for help. Dial 9-1-1 or other  
local emergency number in the case of fire, traffic accident  
or medical emergencies.  
Important!: If you are using a handset other than a standard numeric keypad,  
please call 1-888-901-7233.  
Provided by the Cellular Telecommunications & Internet  
Association.  
9. Use your wireless phone to help others in emergencies. If  
you see an auto accident, crime in progress or other  
serious emergency where lives are in danger, call 9-1-1 or  
other local emergency number, as you would want others  
to do for you.  
Responsible Listening  
Caution!: Avoid potential hearing loss.  
Damage to hearing occurs when a person is exposed to loud  
sounds over time. The risk of hearing loss increases as sound is  
played louder and for longer durations. Prolonged exposure to  
loud sounds (including music) is the most common cause of  
preventable hearing loss. Some scientific research suggests that  
using portable audio devices, such as portable music players and  
cellular telephones, at high volume settings for long durations  
may lead to permanent noise-induced hearing loss. This includes  
the use of headphones (including headsets, earbuds, and  
Bluetooth or other wireless devices). Exposure to very loud sound  
has also been associated in some studies with tinnitus (a ringing  
in the ear), hypersensitivity to sound and distorted hearing.  
10. Call roadside assistance or a special non-emergency  
wireless assistance number when necessary. If you see a  
broken-down vehicle posing no serious hazard, a broken  
traffic signal, a minor traffic accident where no one  
appears injured, or a vehicle you know to be stolen, call  
roadside assistance or other special non-emergency  
number.  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
201  
   
Individual susceptibility to noise-induced hearing loss and  
potential hearing problem varies. Additionally, the amount of  
sound produced by a portable audio device varies depending on  
the nature of the sound, the device settings, and the headphones  
that are used. As a result, there is no single volume setting that is  
appropriate for everyone or for every combination of sound,  
settings and equipment.  
•
•
Avoid using headphones after exposure to extremely loud noises, such  
as rock concerts, that might cause temporary hearing loss. Temporary  
hearing loss might cause unsafe volumes to sound normal.  
Do not listen at any volume that causes you discomfort. If you  
experience ringing in your ears, hear muffled speech or experience  
any temporary hearing difficulty after listening to your portable audio  
device, discontinue use and consult your doctor.  
You should follow some commonsense recommendations when  
using any portable audio device:  
You can obtain additional information on this subject from the  
following sources:  
•
Set the volume in a quiet environment and select the lowest volume at  
which you can hear adequately.  
American Academy of Audiology  
11730 Plaza American Drive, Suite 300  
Reston, VA 20190  
•
When using headphones, turn the volume down if you cannot hear the  
people speaking near you or if the person sitting next to you can hear  
what you are listening to.  
Voice: (800) 222-2336  
•
•
Do not turn the volume up to block out noisy surroundings. If you  
choose to listen to your portable device in a noisy environment, use  
noise-cancelling headphones to block out background environmental  
noise. By blocking background environment noise, noise cancelling  
headphones should allow you to hear the music at lower volumes than  
when using earbuds.  
Email: [email protected]  
Internet: http://www.audiology.org  
Limit the amount of time you listen. As the volume increases, less time  
is required before you hearing could be affected.  
202  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating Environment  
Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any area  
and always switch your phone off whenever it is forbidden to use  
it, or when it may cause interference or danger.  
National Institute on Deafness and Other Communication Disorders  
National Institutes of Health  
31 Center Drive, MSC 2320  
Bethesda, MD 20892-2320  
When connecting the phone or any accessory to another device,  
read its user's guide for detailed safety instructions. Do not  
connect incompatible products.  
Email: [email protected]  
Internet: http://www.nidcd.nih.gov/  
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH)  
395 E Street, S.W.  
As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are  
advised that for the satisfactory operation of the equipment and  
for the safety of personnel, it is recommended that the  
equipment should only be used in the normal operating position  
(held to your ear with the antenna pointing over your shoulder if  
you are using an external antenna).  
Suite 9200  
Patriots Plaza Building  
Washington, DC 20201  
UsingYourPhoneNearOtherElectronicDevices  
Voice: 1-800-35-NIOSH (1-800-356-4647)  
1-800-CDC-INFO (1-800-232-4636)  
Outside the U.S. 513-533-8328  
Email: [email protected]  
Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from radio  
frequency (RF) signals. However, certain electronic equipment  
may not be shielded against the RF signals from your wireless  
phone. Consult the manufacturer to discuss alternatives.  
Implantable Medical Devices  
Internet: http://www.cdc.gov  
A minimum separation of six (6) inches should be maintained  
between a handheld wireless phone and an implantable medical  
device, such as a pacemaker or implantable cardioverter  
defibrillator, to avoid potential interference with the device.  
1-888-232-6348 TTY  
Internet: http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/topics/noise/default.html  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
203  
     
Persons who have such devices:  
The intent of the HAC Act is to ensure reasonable access to  
telecommunications services for persons with hearing  
disabilities.  
•
Should ALWAYS keep the phone more than six (6) inches from their  
implantable medical device when the phone is turned ON;  
Should not carry the phone in a breast pocket;  
•
•
While some wireless phones are used near some hearing devices  
(hearing aids and cochlear implants), users may detect a  
buzzing, humming, or whining noise. Some hearing devices are  
more immune than others to this interference noise, and phones  
also vary in the amount of interference they generate.  
Should use the ear opposite the implantable medical device to  
minimize the potential for interference;  
•
•
Should turn the phone OFF immediately if there is any reason to  
suspect that interference is taking place;  
Should read and follow the directions from the manufacturer of your  
implantable medical device. If you have any questions about using  
your wireless phone with such a device, consult your health care  
provider.  
The wireless telephone industry has developed a rating system  
for wireless phones, to assist hearing device users find phones  
that may be compatible with their hearing devices. Not all phones  
have been rated. Phones that are rated have the rating on their  
box or a label located on the box.  
For more information see:  
The ratings are not guarantees. Results will vary depending on  
the user's hearing device and hearing loss. If your hearing device  
happens to be vulnerable to interference, you may not be able to  
use a rated phone successfully. Trying out the phone with your  
hearing device is the best way to evaluate it for your personal  
needs.  
http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-faqs.html  
FCC Hearing-Aid Compatibility (HAC)  
Regulations for Wireless Devices  
On July 10, 2003, the U.S. Federal Communications Commission  
(FCC) Report and Order in WT Docket 01-309 modified the  
exception of wireless phones under the Hearing Aid Compatibility  
Act of 1988 (HAC Act) to require digital wireless phones be  
compatible with hearing-aids.  
M-Ratings: Phones rated M3 or M4 meet FCC requirements and  
are likely to generate less interference to hearing devices than  
phones that are not labeled. M4 is the better/higher of the two  
ratings.  
204  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
T-Ratings: Phones rated T3 or T4 meet FCC requirements and are  
likely to generate less interference to hearing devices than  
phones that are not labeled. T4 is the better/higher of the two  
ratings.  
"Normal usage" in this context is defined as a signal quality that  
is acceptable for normal operation.  
The M mark is intended to be synonymous with the U mark. The  
T mark is intended to be synonymous with the UT mark. The M  
and T marks are recommended by the Alliance for  
Telecommunications Industries Solutions (ATIS). The U and UT  
marks are referenced in Section 20.19 of the FCC Rules.  
Hearing devices may also be rated. Your hearing device  
manufacturer or hearing health professional may help you find  
this rating. Higher ratings mean that the hearing device is  
relatively immune to interference noise. The hearing aid and  
wireless phone rating values are then added together. A sum of 5  
is considered acceptable for normal use. A sum of 6 is  
considered for best use.  
The HAC rating and measurement procedure are described in the  
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C63.19 standard.  
Other Medical Devices  
If you use any other personal medical devices, consult the  
manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately  
shielded from external RF energy. Your physician may be able to  
assist you in obtaining this information. Switch your phone off in  
health care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas  
instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be  
using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy.  
T3  
+
T2  
=
5
M3  
+
M2  
=
5
Vehicles  
In the above example, if a hearing aid meets the M2 level rating  
and the wireless phone meets the M3 level rating, the sum of the  
two values equal M5. This is synonymous for T ratings. This  
should provide the hearing aid user with "normal usage" while  
using their hearing aid with the particular wireless phone.  
RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately  
shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles. Check with the  
manufacturer or its representative regarding your vehicle. You  
should also consult the manufacturer of any equipment that has  
been added to your vehicle.  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
205  
 
Posted Facilities  
programmed functions, which cannot guarantee connection in all  
conditions. Therefore, you should never rely solely on any  
wireless phone for essential communications (medical  
emergencies, for example).  
Switch your phone off in any facility where posted notices require  
you to do so.  
Potentially Explosive Environments  
Remember, to make or receive any calls the phone must be  
switched on and in a service area with adequate signal strength.  
Emergency calls may not be possible on all wireless phone  
networks or when certain network services and/or phone  
features are in use. Check with local service providers.  
Switch your phone off when in any area with a potentially  
explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions. Sparks  
in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily  
injury or even death.  
Users are advised to switch the phone off while at a refueling  
point (service station). Users are reminded of the need to observe  
restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots (fuel  
storage and distribution areas), chemical plants or where blasting  
operations are in progress.  
To make an emergency call:  
1. If the phone is not on, switch it on.  
2. Key in the emergency number for your present location (for  
example, 911 or other official emergency number).  
Emergency numbers vary by location.  
Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often but not  
always clearly marked. They include below deck on boats,  
chemical transfer or storage facilities, vehicles using liquefied  
petroleum gas (such as propane or butane), areas where the air  
contains chemicals or particles, such as grain, dust or metal  
powders, and any other area where you would normally be  
advised to turn off your vehicle engine.  
3. Press the  
key.  
If certain features are in use (call barring, for example), you may  
first need to deactivate those features before you can make an  
emergency call. Consult this document and your local cellular  
service provider.  
Emergency Calls  
This phone, like any wireless phone, operates using radio  
signals, wireless and landline networks as well as user-  
When making an emergency call, remember to give all the  
necessary information as accurately as possible. Remember that  
your phone may be the only means of communication at the  
206  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
scene of an accident; do not cut off the call until given  
permission to do so.  
Cautions  
Any changes or modifications to your phone not expressly  
approved in this document could void your warranty for this  
equipment, and void your authority to operate this equipment.  
Only use approved batteries, antennas and chargers. The use of  
any unauthorized accessories may be dangerous and void the  
phone warranty if said accessories cause damage or a defect to  
the phone.  
Restricting Children's access to your Phone  
Your phone is not a toy. Children should not be allowed to play  
with it because they could hurt themselves and others, damage  
the phone or make calls that increase your phone bill.  
FCC Notice and Cautions  
FCC Notice  
Although your phone is quite sturdy, it is a complex piece of  
equipment and can be broken. Avoid dropping, hitting, bending  
or sitting on it.  
The phone may cause TV or radio interference if used in close  
proximity to receiving equipment. The FCC can require you to  
stop using the phone if such interference cannot be eliminated.  
Other Important Safety Information  
Vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or  
butane) must comply with the National Fire Protection Standard  
(NFPA-58). For a copy of this standard, contact the National Fire  
Protection Association:  
•
Only qualified personnel should service the phone or install the phone  
in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may  
invalidate any warranty applicable to the device.  
•
•
•
Check regularly that all wireless phone equipment in your vehicle is  
mounted and operating properly.  
NFPA (National Fire Protection Agency)  
1 Batterymarch Park  
Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases or explosive materials in  
the same compartment as the phone, its parts or accessories.  
For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that an air bag  
inflates with great force. Do not place objects, including both installed  
or portable wireless equipment in the area over the air bag or in the air  
bag deployment area. If wireless equipment is improperly installed and  
the air bag inflates, serious injury could result.  
Quincy, Massachusetts  
USA 02169-7471  
Internet: http://www.nfpa.org  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
207  
   
•
•
Switch your phone off before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless  
phone in aircraft is illegal and may be dangerous to the aircraft's  
operation.  
Understanding How Your Phone Operates  
Your phone is basically a radio transmitter and receiver. When it's  
turned on, it receives and transmits radio frequency (RF) signals.  
When you use your phone, the system handling your call controls  
the power level. This power can range from 0.006 watts to 0.2  
watts in digital mode.  
Failure to observe these instructions may lead to the suspension or  
denial of telephone services to the offender, or legal action, or both.  
Product Performance  
Getting the Most Out of Your Signal Reception  
Maintaining Your Phone's Peak Performance  
The quality of each call you make or receive depends on the  
signal strength in your area. Your phone informs you of the  
current signal strength by displaying a number of bars next to the  
signal strength icon. The more bars displayed, the stronger the  
signal.  
For the best care of your phone, only authorized personnel should  
service your phone and accessories. Faulty service may void the  
warranty.  
There are several simple guidelines to operating your phone  
properly and maintaining safe, satisfactory service.  
If you're inside a building, being near a window may give you  
better reception.  
•
To ensure that the Hearing Aid Compatibility rating for your phone is  
maintained, secondary transmitters such as Bluetooth and WLAN  
components must be disabled during a call. For more information,  
refer to the “Disabling Bluetooth or WLAN” section.  
Understanding the Power Save Feature  
If your phone is unable to find a signal after searching, a Power  
Save feature is automatically activated. If your phone is active, it  
periodically rechecks service availability or you can check it  
yourself by pressing any key.  
•
If your phone is equipped with an external antenna, hold the phone  
with the antenna raised, fully-extended and over your shoulder.  
Do not hold, bend or twist the phone's antenna, if applicable.  
Do not use the phone if the antenna is damaged.  
•
•
•
Anytime the Power Save feature is activated, a message displays  
on the screen. When a signal is found, your phone returns to  
standby mode.  
If your phone is equipped with an internal antenna, obstructing the  
internal antenna could inhibit call performance.  
•
Speak directly into the phone's receiver.  
208  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
•
Avoid exposing your phone and accessories to rain or liquid spills. If  
your phone does get wet, immediately turn the power off and remove  
the battery. If it is inoperable, call Customer Care for service.  
•
If you use the phone near the network's base station, it uses less  
power; talk and standby time are greatly affected by the signal  
strength on the cellular network and the parameters set by the  
network operator.  
Availability of Various Features/Ring Tones  
•
•
Follow battery usage, storage and charging guidelines found in the  
user’s guide.  
Many services and features are network dependent and may  
require additional subscription and/or usage charges. Not all  
features are available for purchase or use in all areas.  
Downloadable Ring Tones may be available at an additional cost.  
Other conditions and restrictions may apply. See your service  
provider for additional information.  
Battery charging time depends on the remaining battery charge and  
the type of battery and charger used. The battery can be charged and  
discharged hundreds of times, but it will gradually wear out. When the  
operation time (talk time and standby time) is noticeably shorter than  
normal, it is time to buy a new battery.  
Battery Standby and Talk Time  
•
•
If left unused, a fully charged battery will discharge itself over time.  
Standby and talk times will vary depending on phone usage  
patterns and conditions. Battery power consumption depends on  
factors such as network configuration, signal strength, operating  
temperature, features selected, frequency of calls, and voice,  
data, and other application usage patterns.  
Use only Samsung-approved batteries and recharge your battery only  
with Samsung-approved chargers. When a charger is not in use,  
disconnect it from the power source. Do not leave the battery  
connected to a charger for more than a week, since overcharging may  
shorten its life.  
Battery Precautions  
•
Do not use incompatible cell phone batteries and chargers. Some Web  
sites and second-hand dealers, not associated with reputable  
manufacturers and carriers, might be selling incompatible or even  
counterfeit batteries and chargers. Consumers should purchase  
manufacturer or carrier recommended products and accessories. If  
unsure about whether a replacement battery or charger is compatible,  
contact the manufacturer of the battery or charger.  
•
Avoid dropping the cell phone. Dropping it, especially on a hard  
surface, can potentially cause damage to the phone and battery. If you  
suspect damage to the phone or battery, take it to a service center for  
inspection.  
•
•
Never use any charger or battery that is damaged in any way.  
Do not modify or remanufacture the battery as this could result in  
serious safety hazards.  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
209  
     
•
Misuse or use of incompatible phones, batteries, and charging devices  
could result in damage to the equipment and a possible risk of fire,  
explosion, leakage, or other serious hazard.  
•
•
Do not crush, puncture or put a high degree of pressure on the battery  
as this can cause an internal short-circuit, resulting in overheating.  
Dispose of used batteries in accordance with local regulations. In some  
areas, the disposal of batteries in household or business trash may be  
prohibited. For safe disposal options for Li-Ion batteries, contact your  
nearest Samsung authorized service center. Always recycle. Do not  
dispose of batteries in a fire.  
•
•
Extreme temperatures will affect the charging capacity of your battery:  
it may require cooling or warming first.  
Do not leave the battery in hot or cold places, such as in a car in  
summer or winter conditions, as you will reduce the capacity and  
lifetime of the battery. Always try to keep the battery at room  
temperature. A phone with a hot or cold battery may temporarily not  
work, even when the battery is fully charged. Li-ion batteries are  
particularly affected by temperatures below  
Care and Maintenance  
Your phone is a product of superior design and craftsmanship  
and should be treated with care. The suggestions below will help  
you fulfill any warranty obligations and allow you to enjoy this  
product for many years.  
0 °C (32 °F).  
•
•
Do not place the phone in areas that may get very hot, such as on or  
near a cooking surface, cooking appliance, iron, or radiator.  
•
•
•
•
•
Keep the phone and all its parts and accessories out of the reach of  
small children.  
Do not get your phone or battery wet. Even though they will dry and  
appear to operate normally, the circuitry could slowly corrode and  
pose a safety hazard.  
Keep the phone dry. Precipitation, humidity and liquids contain  
minerals that will corrode electronic circuits.  
Do not use the phone with a wet hand. Doing so may cause an electric  
shock to you or damage to the phone.  
•
Do not short-circuit the battery. Accidental short-circuiting can occur  
when a metallic object (coin, clip or pen) causes a direct connection  
between the + and - terminals of the battery (metal strips on the  
battery), for example when you carry a spare battery in a pocket or  
bag. Short-circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the  
object causing the short-circuiting.  
Do not use or store the phone in dusty, dirty areas, as its moving parts  
may be damaged.  
Do not store the phone in hot areas. High temperatures can shorten the  
life of electronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain  
plastics.  
•
Do not permit a battery out of the phone to come in contact with metal  
objects, such as coins, keys or jewelry.  
210  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
•
Do not store the phone in cold areas. When the phone warms up to its  
normal operating temperature, moisture can form inside the phone,  
which may damage the phone's electronic circuit boards.  
Do not drop, knock or shake the phone. Rough handling can break  
internal circuit boards.  
•
•
Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents or strong detergents to  
clean the phone. Wipe it with a soft cloth slightly dampened in a mild  
soap-and-water solution.  
•
•
•
Do not paint the phone. Paint can clog the device's moving parts and  
prevent proper operation.  
Do not put the phone in or on heating devices, such as a microwave  
oven, a stove or a radiator. The phone may explode when overheated.  
If your phone is equipped with an external antenna, use only the  
supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauthorized antennas  
or modified accessories may damage the phone and violate  
regulations governing radio devices.  
•
If the phone, battery, charger or any accessory is not working properly,  
take it to your nearest qualified service facility. The personnel there  
will assist you, and if necessary, arrange for service.  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
211  
Section 21: Warranty Information  
Standard Limited Warranty  
removed or made illegible; (c) any plastic surfaces or other  
externally exposed parts that are scratched or damaged due to  
normal use; (d) malfunctions resulting from the use of Product in  
conjunction with accessories, products, or ancillary/peripheral  
equipment not furnished or approved by SAMSUNG; (e) defects or  
damage from improper testing, operation, maintenance,  
installation, or adjustment; (f) installation, maintenance, and  
service of Product, or (g) Product used or purchased outside the  
United States or Canada.  
What is Covered and For How Long?  
SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA, LLC ("SAMSUNG")  
warrants to the original purchaser ("Purchaser") that SAMSUNG's  
Phones and accessories ("Products") are free from defects in  
material and workmanship under normal use and service for the  
period commencing upon the date of purchase and continuing for  
the following specified period of time after that date:  
This Limited Warranty covers batteries only if battery capacity  
falls below 80% of rated capacity or the battery leaks, and this  
Limited Warranty does not cover any battery if (i) the battery has  
been charged by a battery charger not specified or approved by  
SAMSUNG for charging the battery, (ii) any of the seals on the  
battery are broken or show evidence of tampering, or (iii) the  
battery has been used in equipment other than the SAMSUNG  
phone for which it is specified.  
Phone  
1 Year  
Batteries  
1 Year  
Leather Case  
Holster  
90 Days  
90 Days  
1 Year  
Other Phone Accessories  
What is Not Covered? This Limited Warranty is conditioned upon  
proper use of Product by Purchaser. This Limited Warranty does  
not cover: (a) defects or damage resulting from accident, misuse,  
abuse, neglect, unusual physical, electrical or electromechanical  
stress, or modification of any part of Product, including antenna,  
or cosmetic damage; (b) equipment that has the serial number  
What are SAMSUNG's Obligations? During the applicable warranty  
period, SAMSUNG will repair or replace, at SAMSUNG's sole  
option, without charge to Purchaser, any defective component  
part of Product. To obtain service under this Limited Warranty,  
Purchaser must return Product to an authorized phone service  
212  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
facility in an adequate container for shipping, accompanied by  
Purchaser's sales receipt or comparable substitute proof of sale  
showing the date of purchase, the serial number of Product and  
the sellers' name and address. To obtain assistance on where to  
deliver the Product, call Samsung Customer Care at 1-888-987-  
4357. Upon receipt, SAMSUNG will promptly repair or replace the  
defective Product. SAMSUNG may, at SAMSUNG's sole option,  
use rebuilt, reconditioned, or new parts or components when  
repairing any Product or replace Product with a rebuilt,  
reconditioned or new Product. Repaired/replaced leather cases,  
pouches and holsters will be warranted for a period of ninety (90)  
days. All other repaired/replaced Product will be warranted for a  
period equal to the remainder of the original Limited Warranty on  
the original Product or for 90 days, whichever is longer. All  
replaced parts, components, boards and equipment shall  
become the property of SAMSUNG.  
OR OTHERWISE, OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO  
THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO:  
•
THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THE PRODUCT OR ITS FITNESS FOR ANY  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE;  
•
•
•
WARRANTIES OF TITLE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT;  
DESIGN, CONDITION, QUALITY, OR PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT;  
THE WORKMANSHIP OF THE PRODUCT OR THE COMPONENTS  
CONTAINED THEREIN; OR  
•
COMPLIANCE OF THE PRODUCT WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF ANY  
LAW, RULE, SPECIFICATION OR CONTRACT PERTAINING THERETO.  
NOTHING CONTAINED IN THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SHALL BE  
CONSTRUED TO CREATE AN EXPRESS WARRANTY OF ANY KIND  
WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT. ALL IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS THAT MAY ARISE BY OPERATION  
OF LAW, INCLUDING IF APPLICABLE THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES  
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR  
PURPOSE, ARE HEREBY LIMITED TO THE SAME DURATION OF  
TIME AS THE EXPRESS WRITTEN WARRANTY STATED HEREIN.  
SOME STATES/PROVINCES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW  
LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION  
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN ADDITION, SAMSUNG SHALL NOT BE  
LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM THE  
PURCHASE, USE, OR MISUSE OF, OR INABILITY TO USE THE  
PRODUCT OR ARISING DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY FROM THE USE  
If SAMSUNG determines that any Product is not covered by this  
Limited Warranty, Purchaser must pay all parts, shipping, and  
labor charges for the repair or return of such Product.  
WHAT ARE THE LIMITS ON SAMSUNG'S WARRANTY/LIABILITY?  
EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THE EXPRESS WARRANTY CONTAINED  
HEREIN, PURCHASER TAKES THE PRODUCT "AS IS," AND  
SAMSUNG MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION AND  
THERE ARE NO CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, STATUTORY  
Warranty Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
213  
OR LOSS OF USE OF THE PRODUCT OR FROM THE BREACH OF  
THE EXPRESS WARRANTY, INCLUDING INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,  
CONSEQUENTIAL OR SIMILAR DAMAGES, OR LOSS OF  
IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE PRODUCT. SAMSUNG MAKES NO  
WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS AND THERE ARE NO  
CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR  
ANTICIPATED PROFITS OR BENEFITS, OR FOR DAMAGES ARISING  
FROM ANY TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR GROSS  
OTHERWISE, AS TO THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES, OPERATIONS,  
PERFORMANCE OR SUITABILITY OF ANY THIRDPARTY SOFTWARE  
OR EQUIPMENT, WHETHER SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR  
EQUIPMENT IS INCLUDED WITH THE PRODUCT DISTRIBUTED BY  
SAMSUNG OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING THE ABILITY TO  
INTEGRATE ANY SUCH SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT WITH THE  
PRODUCT. THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES, OPERATIONS,  
PERFORMANCE AND SUITABILITY OF ANY SUCH THIRD-PARTY  
SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT LIE SOLELY WITH THE PURCHASER  
AND THE DIRECT VENDOR, OWNER OR SUPPLIER OF SUCH  
THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT, AS THE CASE MAY BE.  
NEGLIGENCE) OR FAULT COMMITTED BY SAMSUNG, ITS AGENTS  
OR EMPLOYEES, OR FOR ANY BREACH OF CONTRACT OR FOR  
ANY CLAIM BROUGHT AGAINST PURCHASER BY ANY OTHER  
PARTY. SOME STATES/PROVINCES DO NOT ALLOW THE  
EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL  
DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT  
APPLY TO YOU. THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL  
RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS, WHICH VARY  
FROM STATE TO STATE/PROVINCE TO PROVINCE. THIS LIMITED  
WARRANTY SHALL NOT EXTEND TO ANYONE OTHER THAN THE  
ORIGINAL PURCHASER OF THIS PRODUCT AND STATES  
PURCHASER'S EXCLUSIVE REMEDY. IF ANY PORTION OF THIS  
LIMITED WARRANTY IS HELD ILLEGAL OR UNENFORCEABLE BY  
REASON OF ANY LAW, SUCH PARTIAL ILLEGALITY OR  
UNENFORCEABILITY SHALL NOT AFFECT THE ENFORCEABILITY  
FOR THE REMAINDER OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY WHICH  
PURCHASER ACKNOWLEDGES IS AND WILL ALWAYS BE  
CONSTRUED TO BE LIMITED BY ITS TERMS OR AS LIMITED AS  
THE LAW PERMITS. THE PARTIES UNDERSTAND THAT THE  
PURCHASER MAY USE THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT  
This Limited Warranty allocates risk of Product failure between  
Purchaser and SAMSUNG, and SAMSUNG's Product pricing  
reflects this allocation of risk and the limitations of liability  
contained in this Limited Warranty. The agents, employees,  
distributors, and dealers of SAMSUNG are not authorized to make  
modifications to this Limited Warranty, or make additional  
warranties binding on SAMSUNG. Accordingly, additional  
statements such as dealer advertising or presentation, whether  
oral or written, do not constitute warranties by SAMSUNG and  
should not be relied upon.  
214  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
only; provided that the backup copy must include all copyright or  
other proprietary notices contained on the original.  
End User License Agreement for Software  
IMPORTANT. READ CAREFULLY: This End User License Agreement  
("EULA") is a legal agreement between you (either an individual  
or a single entity) and Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. for software  
owned by Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. and its affiliated  
companies and its third party suppliers and licensors that  
accompanies this EULA, which includes computer software and  
may include associated media, printed materials, "online" or  
electronic documentation ("Software"). BY CLICKING THE "I  
ACCEPT" BUTTON (OR IF YOU BYPASS OR OTHERWISE DISABLE  
THE "I ACCEPT", AND STILL INSTALL, COPY, DOWNLOAD,  
ACCESS OR OTHERWISE USE THE SOFTWARE), YOU AGREE TO  
BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS EULA. IF YOU DO NOT  
ACCEPT THE TERMS IN THIS EULA, YOU MUST CLICK THE  
"DECLINE" BUTTON, DISCONTINUE USE OF THE SOFTWARE.  
2. RESERVATION OF RIGHTS AND OWNERSHIP. Samsung reserves  
all rights not expressly granted to you in this EULA. The Software  
is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws and  
treaties. Samsung or its suppliers own the title, copyright and  
other intellectual property rights in the Software. The Software is  
licensed, not sold.  
3. LIMITATIONS ON END USER RIGHTS. You may not reverse  
engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to  
discover the source code or algorithms of, the Software (except  
and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by  
applicable law notwithstanding this limitation), or modify, or  
disable any features of, the Software, or create derivative works  
based on the Software. You may not rent, lease, lend, sublicense  
or provide commercial hosting services with the Software.  
1. GRANT OF LICENSE. Samsung grants you the following rights  
provided that you comply with all terms and conditions of this  
EULA: You may install, use, access, display and run one copy of  
the Software on the local hard disk(s) or other permanent storage  
media of one computer and use the Software on a single  
computer or a mobile device at a time, and you may not make  
the Software available over a network where it could be used by  
multiple computers at the same time. You may make one copy of  
the Software in machine-readable form for backup purposes  
4. CONSENT TO USE OF DATA. You agree that Samsung and its  
affiliates may collect and use technical information gathered as  
part of the product support services related to the Software  
provided to you, if any, related to the Software. Samsung may  
use this information solely to improve its products or to provide  
customized services or technologies to you and will not disclose  
this information in a form that personally identifies you.  
Warranty Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
215  
 
5. UPGRADES. This EULA applies to updates, supplements and  
add-on components (if any) of the Software that Samsung may  
provide to you or make available to you after the date you obtain  
your initial copy of the Software, unless we provide other terms  
along with such upgrade. To use Software identified as an  
upgrade, you must first be licensed for the Software identified by  
Samsung as eligible for the upgrade. After upgrading, you may  
no longer use the Software that formed the basis for your  
upgrade eligibility.  
8. TERMINATION. This EULA is effective until terminated. Your  
rights under this License will terminate automatically without  
notice from Samsung if you fail to comply with any of the terms  
and conditions of this EULA. Upon termination of this EULA, you  
shall cease all use of the Software and destroy all copies, full or  
partial, of the Software.  
9. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES. You expressly acknowledge  
and agree that use of the Software is at your sole risk and that  
the entire risk as to satisfactory quality, performance, accuracy  
and effort is with you. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY  
APPLICABLE LAW, THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND  
WITH ALL FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND  
SAMSUNG AND ITS LICENSORS (COLLECTIVELY REFERRED TO AS  
"SAMSUNG" FOR THE PURPOSES OF SECTIONS 9, 10 and 11)  
HEREBY DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH  
RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR  
STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, OF  
SATISFACTORY QUALITY OR WORKMANLIKE EFFORT, OF FITNESS  
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF RELIABILITY OR AVAILABILITY,  
OF ACCURACY, OF LACK OF VIRUSES, OF QUIET ENJOYMENT,  
AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. SAMSUNG  
DOES NOT WARRANT AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR  
ENJOYMENT OF THE SOFTWARE, THAT THE FUNCTIONS  
CONTAINED IN THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR  
6. SOFTWARE TRANSFER. You may not transfer this EULA or the  
rights to the Software granted herein to any third party unless it  
is in connection with the sale of the mobile device which the  
Software accompanied. In such event, the transfer must include  
all of the Software (including all component parts, the media and  
printed materials, any upgrades, this EULA) and you may not  
retain any copies of the Software. The transfer may not be an  
indirect transfer, such as a consignment. Prior to the transfer, the  
end user receiving the Software must agree to all the EULA  
terms.  
7. EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You acknowledge that the Software is  
subject to export restrictions of various countries. You agree to  
comply with all applicable international and national laws that  
apply to the Software, including the U.S. Export Administration  
Regulations, as well as end user, end use, and destination  
restrictions issued by U.S. and other governments.  
216  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REQUIREMENTS, THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL  
BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE  
SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN  
INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY SAMSUNG OR A SAMSUNG  
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY.  
SHOULD THE SOFTWARE PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE  
ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR  
CORRECTION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE  
EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR LIMITATIONS ON  
APPLICABLE STATUTORY RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER, SO THESE  
EXCLUSIONS AND LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.  
OR OTHERWISE) AND EVEN IF SAMSUNG HAS BEEN ADVISED OF  
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO  
NOT ALLOW THE LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR PERSONAL  
INJURY, OR OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO  
THIS LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.  
11. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. Notwithstanding any damages that  
you might incur for any reason whatsoever (including, without  
limitation, all damages referenced herein and all direct or general  
damages in contract or anything else), the entire liability of  
Samsung under any provision of this EULA and your exclusive  
remedy hereunder shall be limited to the greater of the actual  
damages you incur in reasonable reliance on the Software up to  
the amount actually paid by you for the Software or US$5.00. The  
foregoing limitations, exclusions and disclaimers (including  
Sections 9, 10 and 11) shall apply to the maximum extent  
permitted by applicable law, even if any remedy fails its essential  
purpose.  
10. EXCLUSION OF INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL AND CERTAIN  
OTHER DAMAGES. TO THE EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY LAW, IN  
NO EVENT SHALL SAMSUNG BE LIABLE FOR PERSONAL INJURY,  
OR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL  
DAMAGES WHATSOEVER, OR FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF  
DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR FOR ANY PECUNIARY  
DAMAGES OR LOSSES, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO YOUR  
USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, THE PROVISION OF  
OR FAILURE TO PROVIDE SUPPORT OR OTHER SERVICES,  
INFORMATION, SOFTWARE, AND RELATED CONTENT THROUGH  
THE SOFTWARE OR OTHERWISE ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF  
THE SOFTWARE, OR OTHERWISE UNDER OR IN CONNECTION  
WITH ANY PROVISION OF THIS EULA, HOWEVER CAUSED,  
REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY (CONTRACT, TORT  
12. U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS. The Software is licensed  
only with "restricted rights" and as "commercial items"  
consisting of "commercial software" and "commercial software  
documentation" with only those rights as are granted to all other  
end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein.  
Warranty Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
217  
13. APPLICABLE LAW. This EULA is governed by the laws of  
TEXAS, without regard to conflicts of laws principles. This EULA  
shall not be governed by the UN Convention on Contracts for the  
International Sale of Goods, the application of which is expressly  
excluded. If a dispute, controversy or difference is not amicably  
settled, it shall be finally resolved by arbitration in Seoul, Korea in  
accordance with the Arbitration Rules of the Korean Commercial  
Arbitration Board. The award of arbitration shall be final and  
binding upon the parties.  
To avoid unintended information leaks and other problems of this  
sort, it is recommended that the device be returned to Samsung’s  
Customer Care Center for an Extended File System (EFS) Clear  
which will eliminate all user memory and return all settings to  
default settings. Please contact the Samsung Customer Care  
Center for details.  
Important!: Please provide warranty information (proof of purchase) to  
Samsung’s Customer Care Center in order to provide this service  
at no charge. If the warranty has expired on the device, charges  
may apply.  
14. ENTIRE AGREEMENT; SEVERABILITY. This EULA is the entire  
agreement between you and Samsung relating to the Software  
and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous oral or written  
communications, proposals and representations with respect to  
the Software or any other subject matter covered by this EULA. If  
any provision of this EULA is held to be void, invalid,  
unenforceable or illegal, the other provisions shall continue in full  
force and effect.  
Customer Care Center:  
1000 Klein Rd.  
Plano, TX 75074  
Toll Free Tel: 1.888.987.HELP (4357)  
Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC:  
1301 East Lookout Drive  
Precautions for Transfer and Disposal  
Richardson, Texas 75082  
If data stored on this device is deleted or reformatted using the  
standard methods, the data only appears to be removed on a  
superficial level, and it may be possible for someone to retrieve  
and reuse the data by means of special software.  
Phone: 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)  
Important!: If you are using a handset other than a standard numeric keypad,  
dial the numbers listed in brackets.  
218  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Phone: 1-888-987-HELP (4357)  
©
2010 Samsung Telecommunications America. All rights  
reserved.  
No reproduction in whole or in part allowed without prior written  
approval. Specifications and availability subject to change  
without notice.  
Warranty Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
219  
Index  
Finding an Address Book Entry 83  
Group Settings 86  
Managing Address Book Entries 88  
Own Phone Number 85  
Service Dialing Numbers 90  
Using Contacts List 83  
Address Book Settings 79  
AIM 112  
Converter 141  
Memo 141  
Music Player 122  
Record Audio 137  
Stopwatch 143  
Tasks 141  
Timer 143  
Tools 137  
Using the Camcorder 104  
Using the Camera 96, 99  
World Clock 142  
AT&T GPS 134  
AT&T Music  
Adding Music to your Handset 123  
Community 133  
A
Abc Mode 41  
Accessing AT&T Music 122  
Adding a New Contact  
Adding More Fields 81  
Deleting Fields 81  
During a Call 81, 82  
Idle Screen 79  
Address Book  
Alarms 96, 138  
Answer Tones 121  
AOL 112  
Adding a New Contact 79  
Adding Pauses to Contact Numbers  
82  
Address Book Entry Options 84  
Checking the Used Space 90  
Copying an entry to the Phone 89  
Copying Entry to Phone 89  
Copying Entry to SIM Card 88  
Deleting all of the Address Book  
Entries 89  
AppCenter  
Answer Tones 121  
Color Graphics 121  
Downloading Multimedia Files 120  
Games 120  
Ringtones 120  
Application Settings  
Calendar 73  
Applications  
Alarms 138  
Calculator 141  
Calendar 139  
Music Apps 133  
Music Player 122  
Music Videos 132  
MusicID 2 130  
Playing Music Through a Stereo  
Bluetooth Device 125  
Playing Music while Using the Phone  
125  
Dialing a Number 83  
Favorites 88  
FDN (Fixed Dialing Number) Mode  
85  
220  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Playlists 126  
Shop Music 123  
Transferring Music From the Digital  
Music Stores 124  
Transferring Music Windows Media  
Player 127  
Brightness 60  
Browser  
Preferences 152  
Settings 154  
Manual Pause Dialing 27  
Missed Call Details 33  
Options During a Call 35  
Putting a Call on Hold 36  
Recent Calls 31  
C
Saving the Missed Call Number to  
Address Book 33  
Calculator 97  
Calendar 139  
XM Radio 131  
AT&T Navigator 134  
AT&T Yahoo! 112  
Audio 92  
Audio Folder 138  
creating a new recording 93  
B
Backlight  
settings 60  
Battery  
charging 8  
Searching for a Number in Address  
Book 38  
Send Message to Missed Call 33  
Using the Speakerphone 37  
Viewing All Calls 32  
Viewing Missed Calls 32  
Camcorder 104  
Accessing the Video Folder 106  
Camcorder Options 105  
Shooting Video 105  
Deleting an Event 140  
Viewing an Event 140  
Call Functions 27  
3-Way Calling (Multi-Party Calling)  
38  
Address Book 29  
Adjusting the Call Volume 35  
Answering a Call 29  
Call Back Missed Call 33  
Call Time 34  
Camera 96  
Installing 7  
Call Waiting 38  
Accessing the Pictures Folder 103  
Camera Options 100  
Picture Folder 103  
low battery indicator 9  
BellSouth 112  
Birthday Widget 26  
Block Caller 32  
Bluetooth Device  
Stereo 125  
Correcting the Number 28  
Data Counter 35  
Deleting Missed Call 34  
Dialing a Recent Number 28  
Ending a Call 28  
Taking Pictures 96, 99  
Camera Options  
Settings 101  
Shooting mode 100  
International Call 27  
Making a Call 27  
221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Timer 101  
GPS Applications 136  
Graphics 121  
Group  
Adding an Entry 87  
Creating New Group 86  
Editing 87  
Removing an Entry 87  
Group Settings  
E
White Balance 101  
Cellular Video 76  
Cellular Video (CV)  
Adding a Video Alert 77  
Customizing 77  
My Purchases 77  
Parental Controls 77  
Updating Favorites 77  
Change Phone Password 64  
Changing Your Settings 52  
Charging battery 8  
Check PIN code 63  
Clear Phone Memory 74  
Converter 97  
Entering Text 40  
Changing the Text Entry Mode 41,  
45, 48  
Using 123Sym Mode 49  
Using ABC Mode 43  
Using Abc Mode 50  
Using Emo Mode 50  
Using Numeric 44  
Using Symbols 44  
Using T9 Mode 42, 49  
Event Widget 26  
F
Editing a Caller Group 87  
H
HAC 204  
Handwriting 44  
Changing Text Input 45  
Entering Characters 46  
Entering Numbers 46  
Entering Symbols 47  
Health and Safety Information 192  
I
FDN  
Changing the Status 85  
Creating New Numbers 85  
Fixed Dialing Mode 64  
Full Screen Mode 146  
G
Cookies  
Deleting 151  
Options 151  
Copying a URL 149  
Icons, description 15  
IMS Settings 71  
In-Call Options 36  
International Call 27  
K
D
Games 120  
Digital Music Stores 124  
Display  
icons 15  
Games & Apps 118  
Getting Started 6  
Setting Up Your Phone 6  
Voice mail 10  
Keyboard  
Changing Text Input 48  
222  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
using 123Sym mode 49  
using Abc mode 50  
using Emo mode 50  
L
Landscape orientation 47  
Lock Applications 63  
M
MEdia Net and WAP  
Accessing the MEdia Net Homepage  
152  
Accessing the MEdia Net Site 154  
Changing WAP Profiles 154  
Navigating with the WAP Browser  
144  
Using Favorites 148  
Memory  
Used Space 117  
Memory Card Installation 7  
Memory Management 73  
Used Space 74  
Menu Navigation 18  
Messaging  
Signing into Your Mobile Email 112  
Templates 116  
Types of Messages 108  
Using Message Options 111  
microSD card  
Installing 7  
Mobile Email  
AIM 112  
AOL 112  
AT&T Yahoo! 112  
BellSouth 112  
Windows Live Mail 112  
Mobile Video  
Video Categories 76  
Viewing a Video Clip 76  
M-Ratings 204  
Multitasking 125  
Functions 17  
Menu 17  
Music 93  
Music File Extensions  
3GP 122  
AAC 122  
MP4 122  
WMA 122  
Music Player 122  
Music Videos  
Music Video Options 132  
Viewing a Video Clip 132  
MusicID 2  
Exit 131  
Getting Help 131  
Identify Song 130  
Mute 36, 38  
My Stuff  
Alarms 96  
Audio 92  
Calculator 97  
Calendar 96  
Camera 96  
Converter 97  
Games & Apps 93, 118  
Memo 97  
Music 93  
Other Files 98  
Picture 93  
Recent Calls 97  
Recorded Audio 93  
Creating and Sending Text  
Messages 108  
Settings 113  
M4A 122  
MP3 122  
223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ringback Tones 93  
Shop Applications 119  
Shop Games 118  
Stopwatch 98  
Tasks 97  
PC Studio  
Configuring USB Mode 156  
Disk Burning 189  
Disk Ripping 188  
Downloading the Media Manager  
156  
Switching On/Off 9  
Phone Information 75  
Phone Lock 63  
Phone Safety 203  
Phone Settings 62  
Playlists  
Timer 98  
Tones 92  
Tools 95  
Used Space 98  
Video 95  
World Clock 98  
Image Viewer 185  
Music Manager 159  
Music Player 180  
NPS File Folders 157  
Photo Manager 164  
Settings 159  
Adding songs to a Playlist 126  
Creating a Playlist 126  
Importing a Playlist from Windows  
Media Player 129  
Removing songs from a Playlist 127  
Power Search tab 20  
Powering  
N
Slide Maker 176  
Toolbox 158  
Network Profile  
Configuration 70  
Network Selection 70  
Number mode 41  
P
On/Off 9  
User Stage 158  
Video Converter 186  
Video Editor 177  
Video Manager 171  
Video Player 183  
PC Studio Media Manager 156  
Phone  
Front View 11  
icons 15  
Rear View 14  
Side View 13  
Q
QWERTY built-in keypad 40  
QWERTY keyboard (landscape) 47  
R
Paragraph  
Inserting a Return 46  
Parental Controls  
Configuring Filters 78  
Setup 78  
Password  
Changing 64  
Recent Calls 31, 97, 140  
Record Audio  
Audio Folder 138  
Recorded Audio 93  
RingbackTones 93  
Ringtones 120  
224  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Stopwatch 98  
Swap 37  
Symbol mode 41  
Touch Screen 10  
Lock/Unlock 10  
Transition Effect 60  
T-Ratings 205  
Travel Adapter 8  
TTY Settings 191  
S
SAR values 192  
Security 63  
T
Sending a Ringtone 161  
Sending a URL 149  
Service Dialing Numbers 90  
Settings  
T9 mode 41  
Tasks 97  
Text Input Mode  
U
Address Book 73, 79  
Applications 72  
Call Settings 66  
Display and Light 58  
Phone 62  
Changing within Handwriting 45  
Changing within Keypad 41  
Timer 98  
Tones 92  
Tools  
UL Certification 194  
Understanding Your Phone 11  
Features of Your Phone 11  
Front View 11  
Rear View 14  
Phone Information 75  
Record Audio 72  
Security 63  
Software Update 75  
Sound 52  
Time & Date 60  
Video Share 72  
SIM card  
Alarms 138  
Side Views 13  
Unmute 36  
URL  
Copying to Message 149  
Entering Manually 148  
Sending 149  
Calculator 141  
Calendar 139  
Camera 99  
Converter 141  
Memo 141  
Recent Calls 140  
Record Audio 137  
Stopwatch 143  
Tasks 141  
Used Space 90, 98, 117  
Using Favorites  
Installing 6  
Accessing a Web Site Using  
Favorites 148  
Adding Favorites 148  
Deleting a Favorite 149  
Editing Favorites 149  
Speakerphone Key 37  
Standard Limited Warranty  
212  
Timer 143  
World Clock 142  
225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Windows Live Hotmail 112  
World Clock 142  
Y
V
Video 95  
Video Editor 173  
Video Features 76  
Video Share 30  
IMS Settings 71  
In-Call 31  
YPmobile 90  
Initiating and Receiving a Video  
Share Session 30  
Play a Recording 31  
Settings 72  
Voice Mail  
Accessing 10  
From Another Phone 10  
Setup 10  
W
Warranty Information 212  
Widgets 21  
Accessing 25  
Activation 25  
Adding to the Widget bar 22  
Deleting from the Widget bar 22  
Event 26  
Rearranging 25  
Undocking 25  
226  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Q Logic Computer Hardware QLA12160 User Guide
Quantum Computer Drive Atlas II User Guide
Radio Shack Portable Radio 12 500 User Guide
RCA Clothes Dryer BWXR473 User Guide
RCA TV Cables EZ300HD User Guide
Ricoh Printer SP 9100DN User Guide
Roberts Radio Radio R9943 User Guide
Samsung Tablet SM T110 User Guide
Sanyo Camera Accessories UF463450F User Guide
Sanyo Coffeemaker SAC MST6 User Guide